JP2020141942A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing an interest.SOLUTION: In a component set performance for displaying component images relating to a controller image and a push button image used for an operation promotion performance in steps before starting the operation promotion performance in a super-ready-to-win performance, an operation of a stick controller A is promoted through a controller assembly performance in an operation promotion performance. Zone display for indicating a display change high-probability zone is displayed in an upper part of an image display device and is controlled to a display change high-probability zone. In a shift to a display change high-probability zone, a display mode of specific display is changed easily. Changing timing of specific display is provided also after completion of a display change high-probability zone, and a display mode is more easily changed also after completion of a display change high-probability zone in specific display in which a display mode is changed before completion of a display change high-probability zone than in specific display in which a display mode is not changed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-10

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

In a pachinko gaming machine or the like, which is an example of a gaming machine, for example, a push button or an operation lever is provided as a plurality of detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player, and the push button or the operation lever is provided during the operation validity period of the push button or the operation lever. There are some that can execute a promotion effect that encourages the player to operate by displaying an effect image corresponding to the operation lever (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-57252

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when any operation of the push button and the operation lever is enabled, the effect is monotonous only by displaying the effect image corresponding to the effective detection means. Therefore, there was a problem that it was not possible to improve the interest.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest.

The game machine of means 1
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
Detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, a stick controller 31A including a controller sensor unit 35A, a push button 31B including a push sensor 35B, a ball striking operation handle 30 including a handle sensor (not shown), etc.)
The promotion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a stick controller during the operation valid period of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) capable of executing the promotion effect for prompting the player to perform an operation that can be detected by the detection means. A portion capable of executing an operation promotion effect that encourages the player to perform an operation that can be detected by the 31A or the push button 31B. See FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 (B).
Before the promotion effect is executed, the stage effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the stage effect in which the display mode of the special effect image changes stepwise starts the operation promotion effect in the super reach effect. A portion capable of executing a component set effect of stepwise displaying component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 related to the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 used for the operation promotion effect. (See Fig. 8-16), and
The stage effect executing means is an effect image (for example, component images ZA1 to ZA5 or component images ZC1 to 1) related to an effect image (for example, controller image Z1 or push button image Z3) used for the promotion effect as the special effect image. ZC5) can be displayed,
The promotion effect execution means
The promotion effect can be executed in a plurality of types of modes including the first aspect and the second aspect in which the rate of becoming the advantageous state is higher than the case where the promotion effect of the first aspect is executed. Yes (for example, in the operation promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 has a controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A and a character image Z2 "close!" On the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (A). Or, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (B), the image display device 5 displays the push button image Z3 imitating the push button 31B and the character image Z4 "press!").
When the display mode of the special effect image changes to the special display mode in the stage effect, the promotion effect can be executed in the second aspect (for example, the set success based on the effect patterns PT2-2 and PT2-3). When the parts set effect of is executed, the operation of the stick controller 31A is promoted through the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect at a higher rate than when the parts set effect of the set failure based on the effect pattern PT2-1 is executed. Part to be. See Fig. 8-10)
further,
A change effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, and step 57AKS010) that changes the display mode of the specific display.
It is provided with a specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a zone effect of a display change high probability zone).
When the specific effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not executed.
Even after the specific effect is completed, the specific display whose display mode has changed when the specific effect has been executed is displayed more than the specific display whose display mode has not changed when the specific effect has been executed. The mode is easily changed (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the display mode of the special effect image is changed to the special display mode, and the expectation that the promotion effect is executed in the second mode can be gradually increased, so that the interest of the game is improved. To do. Further, according to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest of the game is improved. Further, the player can easily recognize that the staged effect is an effect performed in connection with the promotion effect.

The gaming machine of the means 2 is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The stage effect executing means is an effect image (for example, component images ZA1 to ZA5 or component images ZC1 to 1) related to an effect image (for example, controller image Z1 or push button image Z3) used for the promotion effect as the special effect image. It is characterized in that it can display ZC5).
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the staged effect is an effect performed in connection with the promotion effect.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2.
The stage effect executing means can display a plurality of special effect images in a mode in which it is difficult to specify which of the promotion effect of the first aspect and the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed (for example,. Each part image ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 have a black silhouette having a different outer shape and surface aspect from the parts A1 to A5 of the stick controller 31A or the parts C1 to C5 of the push button 31B in the first and second stages. It is displayed in a common silhouette mode in which white characters "?" Are displayed. See Fig. 8-11).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player's expectation that the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed can be suitably increased.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The stage effect executing means displays the special effect image when a plurality of special effect images are displayed stepwise in the stage effect at a higher rate than in the case where the advantageous state does not occur. A portion in which the mode is changed (for example, when the variable display result is a big hit, the type of the image displayed in the middle is switched (changed) from the component images ZC1 to ZC5 to the component images ZA1 to ZA5. Modification example of FIG. 8-33. 7)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the display mode of the special effect image changes while the number of display of the special effect image increases.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
After displaying the special effect image in a mode in which it is difficult to distinguish which of the first aspect of the promotion effect and the second aspect of the promotion effect is executed in the stage effect, the stage effect execution means said. Which of the promotion effect of the first aspect and the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed is displayed in an identifiable manner (for example, in the parts assembly effect, the part image is displayed in the first to third stages. ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in a silhouette mode, that is, in a difficult-to-identify mode in which it is difficult for the player to discriminate which part image is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. The part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in a clear manner, that is, in an identifiable manner in which the player can identify whether the part image is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. 8-11)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is not known until the middle of the stepwise effect whether the promotion effect of the first aspect or the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed, so that the expectation that the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed is expected. Can be gradually increased, which improves the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The promotion effect executing means can execute the promotion effect in the first aspect when the special effect image does not change to the special display mode in the stage effect (for example, as an operation target of the operation promotion effect). When the push button 31B is determined, the effect patterns PT1-1 and PT2-1 that fail to set are higher than the effect patterns PT1-2, 1-3 and PT2-2, 2-3 that succeed in set. Therefore, when the parts assembly effect based on the effect patterns PT1-1 and PT2-1 that fail to set is executed, there is a high possibility that the push button image Z3 is displayed in the operation promotion effect. 10 (B))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the promotion effect is not executed.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may have.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means 7 to 11. Conventionally, there have been proposed game machines that execute a special zone effect related to a hold display when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-137126. However, there was a risk that the interest would decline after the special zone production was completed.
It was made in view of the above situation, and the purpose is to provide a game machine with improved interest.

The gaming machine of the means 7 is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display.
A change effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, and step 57AKS010) that changes the display mode of the specific display.
It is provided with a specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a zone effect of a display change high probability zone).
When the specific effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not executed.
Even after the specific effect is completed, the specific display whose display mode has changed when the specific effect has been executed is displayed more than the specific display whose display mode has not changed when the specific effect has been executed. The mode is easily changed (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 8 is the gaming machine according to the means 7.
A change suggestion effect (for example, a star shown in FIG. 11-1 (C) or the like) suggesting that the display mode of the specific display changes between when the specific effect is executed and when the specific effect is not executed. The execution rate of the image 57AK004 acting on the specific display) may be different (for example, the change suggestion effect may be executed only in the display change high probability zone).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

The gaming machine of means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 7 to 8.
The specific display in which the display mode is changed to the predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed is more likely to change in the display mode than the specific display in which the display mode is changed to the predetermined mode when the specific effect is not executed. For example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 7 to 9, and is a special effect executing means (for example, a step) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a zone effect of a chance zone) different from the specific effect. The effect control CPU 120) that executes the processes of 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) is provided.
The display mode of the specific display may be changed more easily when the specific effect is executed than when the special effect is executed.
With such a configuration, the production becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 7 to 10.
A special effect executing means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS011) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a zone effect of a chance zone) different from the specific effect is provided.
When the special effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher than when the specific effect is executed.
It may be possible to shift from the specific effect to the special effect (see, for example, FIG. 11-7).
With such a configuration, the production becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view which shows the pachinko game machine 1 used in the feature part 063SG. (A) is a perspective view showing the operation unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the operation unit. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the structure of a push button. (A) is a perspective view showing a ball striking operation handle, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing a structure of a ball striking operation handle. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control process process of a feature part 063SG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process of the feature part 063SG. (A) is a diagram showing the operation target determination ratio in the operation promotion effect, (B) is a diagram showing the assembly effect pattern determination ratio, and (C) is a diagram showing the content of the assembly effect pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the parts assembly effect pattern, and (B) is a diagram showing the component assembly effect pattern determination ratio. (A) is a diagram showing a change mode of the display mode of the push button in the parts assembly effect, and (B) is a diagram showing a change mode of the display mode of the stick controller in the parts assembly effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display of a feature part 063SG. FIGS. (A) to (D) are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the start of the super reach effect. (A) to (R) are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow of parts assembly production. (A) to (R) are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow of parts assembly production. (A) to (R) are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow of parts assembly production. (A) to (G) are diagrams for explaining an example of a controller assembly effect based on the effect pattern A or C. (A) to (H) are diagrams for explaining an example of a controller assembly effect based on the effect pattern B or D. (A) to (F) are diagrams for explaining an example of the operation promotion effect. It is a timing chart explaining an example of production in a jackpot game state. It is a figure explaining the flow of the production from the start of a big hit game state to being controlled to a normal game state via a time saving state. (A) to (E) are diagrams for explaining the flow of the steering wheel assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect A, and (F) is a diagram showing a right-handed notification. (A) to (E) are diagrams for explaining the flow of the steering wheel assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect A, and (F) is a diagram showing a right-handed notification. (G) to (K) are diagrams for explaining the flow of the flow effect of the game ball in the launch operation promotion effect B, and (L) is a diagram showing a right-handed notification. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing the assembly effect in the first modification of the feature portion 063SG. (A) to (E) are diagrams showing the super reach effect in the modified example 2 of the feature portion 063SG. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing the handle assembly effect in the modified example 3 of the feature portion 063SG. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing the path assembly effect in the modified example 4 of the feature portion 063SG. (A) is a diagram showing the operation mode of the movable body, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the movable body. (A) to (C) are explanatory views which show the operation promotion effect as a modification 5. (D) to (G) are explanatory views showing an operation promotion effect as a modification 5. (A) to (C) are explanatory views which show the operation promotion effect as the modification 6 of this feature part 063SG. (A) to (E) are explanatory views which show the operation example of the component set production as the modification 7 of this feature part 063SG. (A) and (B) are explanatory views which show the operation example of the operation promotion effect as the modification 8 of this feature part 063SG. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in the state where the frame for the gaming machine is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 112IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process executed at the time of power-on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the setting change processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution rate, appearance rate, and reliability of the notice X of the feature part 53AK. It is an example of another execution rate, appearance rate, and reliability of the notice X of the feature unit 53AK. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution rate and the appearance rate of the notice Y of the feature part 53AK. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution rate and the appearance rate of the notice Z of the feature part 53AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the feature part 53AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the feature part 57AK. It is a flowchart which shows the specific display process of the feature part 57AK. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the specific display processing. It is a figure which shows the change timing of the display mode of a specific display. It is a figure which shows the display change pattern of the specific display of a feature part 57AK. It is a figure which shows the transition ratio of a zone. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification of the feature part 57AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and hit into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of on hold storage. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the one provided with an electric tulip-type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations below the left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passage gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is suspended, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The general map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big prize opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It is not necessary that there is a "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like, turning off the light, or the operation of the movable body 32.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also called) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (for details, (See below)), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of large winning opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on, it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102, the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102, the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal, the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning or the like) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold memory, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change process, the process of making settings for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening to be open based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like are used as the basis for the big winning opening. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) are set. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73, the timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn it off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effects signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the big hit game state is terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be a form of direct execution using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature part 063SG)
Next, the feature unit 063SG of the present embodiment will be described. In the description of each step of the flowchart in the present embodiment, for example, the part described as "step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "063SGS1", or "normal reach" may be abbreviated as "N reach". "Super reach" may be abbreviated as "S reach" or "SP reach". Further, for a configuration similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description or having a different form, arrangement position, etc. but having the same function, detailed description will be omitted by adding the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 8-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side. The explanation will be given with reference to the direction. The front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a facing surface facing the player playing the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(Game area)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 used in the feature unit 063SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a front view showing the pachinko gaming machine 1 used in the feature unit 063SG. 8-2 is a perspective view showing the operation unit, and FIG. 8-2 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the operation unit. FIG. 8-3 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the push button. 8-4 is a perspective view showing the ball striking operation handle in FIG. 8-4, and FIG. 8-4 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the ball striking operation handle.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, in the game area Y of the pachinko gaming machine 1 used in the feature unit 063SG of the present embodiment, the first path K1 of the flow paths into which the game balls flow down is viewed from the front. The second path K2, which is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the center decorative frame 5c surrounding the image display device 5 and is different from the first path K1 among the flow paths through which the game ball flows, is an image when viewed from the front. It is mainly provided in the area on the right side of the center decorative frame 5c that surrounds the display device 5.

Hitting a game ball into the left side area (left side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to allow the game ball to flow down the first path K1 is called left-handed hitting. Hitting a game ball into the right side area (right side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to allow the game ball to flow down the second path K2 is called right-handed hitting. Since the first route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the left side of the game area Y, it may be called a left-handed route. Further, the second path K2 may be called a right-handed path because it is a path in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the right side of the game area Y. The first route K1 and the second route K2 may be configured by different routes, or may be partially shared routes. The left game area and the right game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of obstacle nails in the game area Y.

In the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the first path K1 is guided so as to be able to enter the winning ball device 6A, while the game ball flowing down the second path K2 has a passing gate 41 and a variable winning ball device. It is designed to be guided so as to be able to enter the 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7. It should be noted that the game ball flowing down the second path K2 may be able to enter the winning ball device 6A.

Further, an movable movable body 32 that can operate is provided above the display area of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 is provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction between the origin position above the display area of the image display device 5 and the effect position located substantially in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 ( (See FIG. 8-29 (A)), the effect control CPU 120 can move the movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position at a predetermined timing during the variable display period or the jackpot game state.

(Operation unit 600)
As shown in FIG. 8-2, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are integrally configured as the operation unit 600. As shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), the stick controller 31A includes a base body 601 mainly made of a metal material, gripping members 602L and 602R that cover the base body 601 from the left and right sides, and front surfaces of the gripping members 602L and 602R. It mainly has a lens cover 603 attached to the side, a back base 604 arranged on the back side of the base body 601 and a push button 31B attached to the upper part of the integrated gripping members 602L and 602R.

The base body 601 is composed of a base portion 601A and a rotating portion 601C that can rotate about a rotating shaft 601B that faces the base portion 601A in the left-right direction. The rear base 604 is provided with a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2), and connects the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2) built in the push button 31B to the effect control board 12. Wiring C, connector CN, etc. for this purpose are provided.

At the time of manufacture, the operation unit 600 is described in, for example, 1. 2. Assemble the back base 604 to the base body 601. 2. Assemble the gripping members 602L and 602R to the rotating portion 601C. 3. Assemble the lens cover 603 on the front surface of the gripping members 602L and 602R. It is configured by assembling in steps 1 to 4, such as assembling the push button 31B on the upper part of the gripping members 602L and 602R. The assembling step is optional, and may be assembled by a step other than the above. Further, it actually has a step of assembling more members than the above.

Further, in the following, for convenience of explanation, the base body 601 will be referred to as a component A1, the back base 604 will be referred to as a component A2, the lens cover 603 will be referred to as a component A3, the push button 31B will be referred to as a component A4, and the gripping members 602L and 602R will be referred to as a component A5. Sometimes. Further, among these parts A1 to A5, the part A5 (grip members 602L, 602R) will be described as a more characteristic part than the other parts A1 to A4. The "characteristic component" is a component that is most easily recognized (specified) by the player as a component that constitutes the stick controller 31A that constitutes a part of the operation unit 600.

Specifically, the parts A5 (grip members 602L, 602R) are described in A.I. Being a member operated (grasping) by the player, B. The shape is such that it is easy to recall that it is a grip portion. It is larger than the other parts A1 to A4 (the area occupied by the entire operation unit 600 is large). Since it is a part that satisfies at least one condition (for example, here, conditions A, B, C, D, etc.) that it is a part that is arranged in a prominent position to the player, in this feature unit 063SG, the stick controller Among the parts of 31A, the characteristic parts will be described as parts A5 (grip members 602L, 602R).

As shown in FIG. 8-2 (A), the stick controller 31A configured in this way grips the grip portion composed of the grip members 602L, 602R and the lens cover 603 and pulls it toward the front side. The operation (operation) by the player is detected by the sensor unit 35A.

(Push button 31B)
As shown in FIG. 8-3, the push button 31B is assembled below the base member 651 and the base member 651, and is arranged below the sensor substrate 652 provided with the push sensor 35B and the base member 651. It is mainly composed of a vibrated member 653 that vibrates by a vibration motor (not shown), a holding member 654 that holds the vibrated member 653, and a transparent cover member 655 that covers the upper part of the holding member 654.

At the time of manufacture, the push button 31B is, for example, 1. 2. Assemble the sensor board 652 to the base member 651. 2. Assemble the sensor board 652 to the base member 651. 3. Assemble the vibrated member 653 to the holding member 654. 5. Assemble to the holding member 654 to which the vibrated member 653 is attached to the base member 651. It is configured by assembling the cover member 655 to the base member 651. The assembling step is optional, and may be assembled by a step other than the above. Further, it actually has a step of assembling more members than the above.

Further, in the following, for convenience of explanation, the base member 651 will be referred to as a component C1, the sensor substrate 652 will be referred to as a component C2, the vibrated member 653 will be referred to as a component C3, the holding member 654 will be referred to as a component C4, and the cover member 655 will be referred to as a component C5. Sometimes. Further, among these parts C1 to C5, the part C5 (cover member 655) will be described as a more characteristic part than the other parts C1 to C4. The "characteristic part" is a part that is most easily recognized (specified) by the player as a part constituting the push button 31B.

Specifically, the part C5 (cover member 655) is described in A.I. Being a member operated (pressed) by the player, B. The shape should be easy to recall as a button, C.I. It is larger than the other parts C1 to C4 (the area occupied by the entire push button 31B is large). Since it is a part that satisfies at least one condition (for example, here, conditions A, B, C, D, etc.) of being a part that is arranged in a prominent position to the player, the push button is used in the feature unit 063SG. A characteristic component among the components of 31B will be described as component C5 (cover member 655).

As shown in FIG. 8-3, the push button 31B configured in this way pushes the operation unit composed of the cover member 655, and the push sensor 35B detects the operation (operation) by the player. It has become like.

(Striking operation handle 30)
As shown in FIG. 8-4, the ball striking operation handle 30 is composed of a handle base 720 attached to the game machine frame 3 by screws (not shown) and various members attached to the front side of the handle base 720. .. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the handle base 720 is composed of a tubular portion 720a and a dish-shaped flange portion 720b whose diameter is expanded from the front end portion of the tubular portion 720a. At the center of the tubular portion 720a, an insertion passage 721 through which the handle shaft 726 is inserted from the front side via the handle collar 727 is formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. Fixing bosses 722 and 723 for fixing the handle cover 735 are projected from the upper portion and the lower portion of the flange portion 720b. The front-rear position of the handle shaft 726 with respect to the insertion passage 721 is determined by the E-ring 726a ringed on the outer circumference.

On the left side of the front surface of the flange portion 720b, a single-shot switch lever 724 having an operation portion 724b operated when launching game balls one by one is provided, and a screw 724a is provided so that the operation portion 724b is arranged outside the flange portion 720b. A single-shot switch 725 for detecting the single-shot switch lever 724 is attached by a screw 725a in the vicinity of the single-shot switch lever 724.

An annular touch ring 728 is non-rotatably attached to the front surface of the flange portion 720b by a screw 728a, and an annular touch mounting plate 729 is attached to the front surface of the touch ring 728 by a screw 729a. Is fixed to the handle base 720. On the front side of the touch mounting plate 729, a handle ring 730 rotated by the player is assembled so as to be rotatable relative to the touch mounting plate 729. The touch ring 728, the handle sensor (not shown), and the single-shot switch 725 are connected to the main board 11 via the payout control board (not shown) by the wiring C, the connector CN, or the like.

The handle ring 730 is formed with a fitting hole 732 in which the tip of the handle shaft 726 is fitted so as not to rotate relative to the center, and an arc-shaped insertion groove through which the fixing boss 722 is inserted is formed around the fitting hole 732. An arc-shaped insertion groove 733b through which the 733a and the fixing boss 723 are inserted is formed, and the fixing boss 722 is inserted into the insertion groove 733a and the fixing boss 723 is inserted into the insertion groove 733b by touch mounting. It is arranged in front of the plate 729.

The handle cover 735 arranged on the front side of the handle ring 730 is decorated with decorations (for example, a model-specific pattern, mark, character, title, manufacturer's logo, etc.) not shown on the front surface of the handle base 720. It is fixed to the fixing boss 722 and 723 by the screw 731a inserted into the fixing boss 722 and the screw 731b inserted into the fixing boss 723 from the back side of the flange portion 720b. Therefore, the handle ring 730 is rotatably mounted around the handle shaft 726 facing in the front-rear direction within a rotation range of about 90 degrees with respect to the touch mounting plate 729. Further, the handle ring 730 is always urged in the counterclockwise rotation direction by the handle spring 734 interposed between the handle cover 735 and the handle ring 730.

At the time of manufacture, the ball striking operation handle 30 is, for example, 1. 2. Assemble the touch ring 728 to the handle base 720. Assemble the touch mounting plate 729, 3. 3. Assemble the handle ring 730 with the handle shaft 726 integrated. It is configured by assembling in steps 1 to 4, such as assembling the handle cover 735. The assembling step is optional, and may be assembled by a step other than the above. Further, it actually has a step of assembling more members than the above.

Further, in the following, for convenience of explanation, the handle base 720 and the touch ring 728 are part B1, the touch mounting plate 729 is part B2, the handle ring 730 is part B3, and the handle cover 735 integrated with the handle shaft 726 is part B4. It may be explained as. Further, among these parts B1 to B4, the part B4 (handle cover 735 with the handle shaft 726 integrated) will be described as a more characteristic part than the other parts B1 to B4. The "characteristic part" is a part that is most easily recognized (specified) by the player as a part that constitutes a part of the ball striking operation handle 30.

Specifically, the part B4 (handle cover 735) is described in A.I. Being a member operated by the player, B. The shape should be easy to recall that it is an operation unit. It is larger than the other parts B1 to B4 (the area occupied by the entire ball striking handle 30 is large), and D.I. In the present embodiment, the part of the ball striking operation handle 30 is a part that satisfies at least one condition (for example, here, conditions C, D, etc.) of being a part that is arranged in a prominent position to the player. The characteristic component will be described as component B4 (handle cover 735).

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), in the ball striking operation handle 30 configured in this way, the handle shaft 726 is rotated by rotating the handle ring 730 clockwise against the urging force of the handle spring 734. By transmitting the amount of rotation to a launching device (not shown), the game ball set at the firing position is launched (launched) with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation.

In the feature unit 063SG, the jackpot type determination table is stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table determines the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced by. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B".

The jackpot types include "probability jackpot A" and "probability jackpot B", in which high-accuracy control and time-saving control are executed after the end of the jackpot game state to shift to the high-accuracy high-base state, and after the end of the jackpot game state. In, only the time saving control is executed and the "non-probability change jackpot" that shifts to the low-probability high-base state is set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, the jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. .. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variation jackpot" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. .. Therefore, "probability change jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) probability variation jackpot, and "probability variation jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probability variation jackpot. It should be noted that the probability variation control and the time saving control are not executed during the big hit game of any of the big hit types.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probability variation jackpot A and the probability variation jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or the special figure game is executed the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before it is played.

Further, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table, "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", and "non-probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "non-probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "non-probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "non-probability variation jackpot A" The allocation of the judgment value for the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in a predetermined range (for example, the value in the range of "71" to "100") is the "probability variation jackpot B" with a small number of rounds. On the other hand, when the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is not assigned to the big hit type of "probability variation big hit B". With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" with a small number of rounds can be different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the big hit type is set to "probability variable big hit B" and the normal open big hit state with a small number of rounds is controlled. Therefore, for example, by high open control accompanying the time saving control In a gaming state in which a game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of a big hit state in which a small number of winning balls are obtained and to prevent the game interest from deteriorating. It has become like.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table, the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the same regardless of whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure (for example, Since it is a value in the range of "1" to "51"), the probability of a non-probability jackpot and the probability of a probabilistic jackpot are determined by the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is the same regardless of whether it exists.

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the judgment value for the "probability change jackpot B" is different depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, the "probability change jackpot A" The assignment of the judgment value to "" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for "probability change jackpot A" with many rounds, the special figure game of the second special figure Is set so that the case of is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure. That is, the second special figure game is considered to be more advantageous to the player than the first special figure game.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, a determination value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is assigned to the big hit type of "probability variation big hit B". You may. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, a smaller determination value than in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure may be assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B". Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

In this way, in this feature unit 063SG, in the normal state (low base state) which is not the time saving state (high base state), even if the game ball flows down the second path K2 by right-handed hitting, the game ball enters the second start winning opening. Because it is difficult for the player to enter, it is more advantageous for the player to win the game ball in the first start winning opening by hitting left, while in the time saving state (high base state) or the big hit game state, the game ball is hit by right. If the second path K2 is flowed down, the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, which is more advantageous for the player than having the game ball win the first starting winning opening by hitting left.

FIG. 8-5 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 063SG. In this feature unit 063SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is variable according to each of the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern") and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although the feature unit 063SG provides only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-5, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 063SG is shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation patterns super reach α and super reach β. It is set. In addition, regarding the special figure variable display time of the super reach variation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in this feature unit 063SG, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed. The special figure variable display time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In this feature unit 063SG, as described above, the variable display result is set to be a "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. Therefore, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and super In the reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the variable display time, the higher the expectation of becoming a "big hit".

Further, in this feature unit 063SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided to determine these variation pattern types. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value of the above, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 8-6 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 063SG. In this feature unit 063SG, the variation pattern to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-6, when the variable display result is a non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is used using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. Is determined from PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot) and PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach jackpot). If the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. It is determined from the fluctuation pattern) and PB1-2 (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot).

As shown in FIG. 8-6, the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1 and PB1-2 is different between the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. Specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, 498 determination values are assigned to PB1-1 and 497 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, 250 determination values are assigned to PB1-1 and 747 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. That is, in the present feature unit 063SG, when the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the variation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach at a higher rate than the case where the variable display result is the non-probability variation jackpot PB1. Since it is determined to be -2, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

If the variable display result is "missing" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variable special figure is 2 or less, the variable pattern determination table A for losing is selected, and the variable display result is selected. The fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-1 (variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach loss) using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss.

Further, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected and the loss. The fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach loss) using the fluctuation pattern determination table B for use.

Further, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 4, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected and the loss. The fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach loss) using the fluctuation pattern determination table C for use.

If the variable display result is "missing" in the time saving state (high base state), select the losing variation pattern determination table D, and use the loss variation pattern determination table D to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. It is determined from (shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), and PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach loss).

That is, when the variable display result is "missing" in the feature unit 063SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved memory of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening fluctuation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

FIG. 8-7 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (step S76) shown in FIG. 7. In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the launch operation promotion effect process of 063SGS162 after the look-ahead advance notice setting process of 063SGS161, and then processes any one of 063SGS170 to 063SGS175 according to the value of the effect process flag. I do. In this feature unit 063SG, the small hit middle effect process of S174 and the small hit end effect process of S175 shown in FIG. 7 are omitted, and the big hit medium effect process of S176 and the ending effect process of S177 are changed to 063SGS174 and 063SGS175, respectively. Move up. Further, the content of the launch operation promotion effect processing will be described later.

FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (063SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is set (063SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer (not shown). The various command data and various flags stored in association with "" are shifted upward by one buffer number (063SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 063SGS271 (063SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (063SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (063SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (063SGS273; Y), the start is started. Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the command buffer received at the time of winning (not shown), one buffer number It shifts upward by the minute (063SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing 063SGS272 or 063SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (063SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (063SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 063SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols "7" as stop symbols. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from a combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the loss, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Loss pattern) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

After the processing of 063SGS276, in 063SGS277, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is the SP reach fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern designation command. When the fluctuation pattern is not the SP reach fluctuation pattern, the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command is selected (063SGS278).

On the other hand, when it is determined in 063SGS277 that the fluctuation pattern is the SP reach fluctuation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 performs an operation promotion effect pattern determination process for determining the operation promotion effect type (063SGS279). Here, the operation promotion effect will be described.

(Operation promotion production)
In the feature unit 063SG, when the super reach fluctuation pattern PA2-2 or PB1-2 is determined in the fluctuation pattern setting process of S111 shown in FIG. 5, the effect control CPU 120 executes the super reach effect during the variable display. At the same time, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is enabled at a predetermined timing during the execution of the super reach effect, and the player performs an operation in which the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be detected during the operation valid period. It urges the player to do so, that is, it executes an operation promotion effect that promotes the operation of either the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B to the player, and when there is an operation, the variable display result is notified. There is.

In the following, the flow from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the end of the super reach effect will be described. 8-13 are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the start of the super reach effect in FIGS. 8-13. 8-14 are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow of the parts assembly effect in FIGS. 8-14. 8-15 are diagrams (A) to (R) for explaining an example of the flow of the parts assembly effect. 8-16 are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow of the parts assembly effect in FIGS. 8-16. 8-17 are diagrams for explaining an example of a controller assembly effect based on the effect pattern A or C in FIGS. 8-17. 8-18 are diagrams for explaining an example of the controller assembly effect based on the effect pattern B or D in FIGS. 8-18. 8-19 are diagrams for explaining an example of the operation promotion effect in FIGS. 8-19.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), and then the decorative symbol is variable as shown in FIG. 8-13 (B). After setting the display mode to a predetermined reach mode, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (C), the super reach effect is started with the development of the super reach. In this feature unit 063SG, as a super reach effect, a battle effect in which a friendly character and an enemy character confront each other is executed. In the feature unit 063SG, a battle effect is executed as a super reach effect, but an effect other than the battle effect may be executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts accepting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B at the timing when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the battle effect, and effectively detects the operation during this operation valid period. An operation promotion effect for promoting the operation of the operation target (stick controller 31A or push button 31B) is executed. As shown in FIG. 8-19 (A), the operation promotion effect is to display a controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A and a character image Z2 "close!" On the image display device 5, or FIG. As shown in B), this is performed by displaying the push button image Z3 imitating the push button 31B and the character image Z4 "press!" On the image display device 5. Note that the speakers 8L and 8R may output "close!" Or "press!" Voices, sound effects, and the like.

Next, the timing at which the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B is input within the operation valid period of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, that is, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the player is detected. The result of the battle effect is notified at the timing when the operation valid period elapses without inputting the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B. For example, when the variable display result is a big hit, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (C) and 8-19 (D), it is notified that the ally character wins the enemy character and the variable display result is a big hit, while it is variable. When the display result is lost, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (E) and 8-19 (F), if the player is defeated, it is notified that the variable display result is lost.

That is, the operation promotion effect is executed at the final stage of the super reach effect, at the timing of notifying whether or not the variable display result is a big hit, during the operation valid period during which the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is valid. It is said to be a production. In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, after notifying that the battle effect has been defeated, the relief effect may be executed to notify that the variable display result is a big hit.

(Controller assembly production)
Further, in the feature unit 063SG, in the operation promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 uses a controller image Z1 or a push that imitates the stick controller 31A as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (A) or 8-19 (B). Before displaying the push button image Z3 imitating the button 31B, that is, before the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B becomes effective, the controller assembly effect of assembling the stick controller 31A can be executed. Then, when the assembly is successful (completed), the controller image Z1 prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A is displayed at a high rate, and when the assembly fails (not completed), the push prompting the operation of the push button 31B is performed. Button image Z3 is displayed at a high rate.

As described with reference to FIG. 8-2, the stick controller 31A is composed of a plurality of parts (members), and in the controller assembly effect, each of the five parts A1 to A5 of the plurality of parts is supported. The parts images ZA1 to ZA5 are assembled in order, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), any of four effect patterns A to D having different assembly orders and assembly results can be executed. It is said that.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (A) to 8-17, the effect pattern A displays the component image ZA1 corresponding to the component A1 and then displays the component image ZA1 corresponding to the component A5 on the component image ZA1. It is displayed in the mode of assembling ZA5, displayed in the mode of assembling the part image ZA2 corresponding to the part A2 to the part image ZA1, and displayed in the mode of assembling the part image ZA3 corresponding to the part A3 to the part image ZA1. Then, by displaying the part image ZA1 corresponding to the part A4 in the manner of assembling the part image ZA4, the completed image ZA6 in which all the part images ZA1 to ZA5 are finally used and the assembly is completed is displayed. In other words, it is a pattern in which assembly is successful (completed).

As shown in FIGS. 8-18 (A) to 8-18 (G), the effect pattern B is an embodiment in which the component image ZA1 corresponding to the component A1 is displayed and then the component image ZA2 corresponding to the component A2 is assembled to the component image ZA1. Is displayed in the form of assembling the part image ZA3 corresponding to the part A3 to the part image ZA1, and is displayed in the form of assembling the part image ZA4 corresponding to the part A4 to the part image ZA1. By displaying the part image ZA5 corresponding to the part A5 in the form of assembling, the completed image ZA6 in which all the part images ZA1 to ZA5 are finally used and the assembly is completed is displayed, that is, the assembly is successful. It is a pattern to be (completed).

As shown in FIGS. 8-17 (A) to (E) and (G), the effect pattern C has the same assembly order as the effect pattern A, but the component image ZA1 shows the component corresponding to the component A4. After displaying in the mode of assembling the image ZA4, the unfinished image ZA7 in which all the part images ZA1 to ZA5 are not used and the assembly is not completed is finally displayed, that is, the pattern in which the assembly fails (not completed). Is.

As shown in FIGS. 8-18 (A) to (F) and (H), the effect pattern D has the same assembly order as the effect pattern B, but the component image ZA1 shows the component corresponding to the component A5. After displaying the image ZA5 in the assembling mode, the unfinished image ZA7 in which all the part images ZA1 to ZA5 are not used and the assembly is not completed is finally displayed, that is, the pattern in which the assembly fails (not completed). Is.

Further, the assembly order of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 in these effect patterns A to D is shown in FIG. 8-2 in order to clearly indicate to the player that the stick controller 31A is being assembled. Since the order is different from the actual assembly order in the described manufacturing process, the effect of production can be enhanced. The assembly order of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 in the effect patterns A to D may be the same as the actual assembly order in the manufacturing process.

Further, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 are images that do not include some of the plurality of components (members) constituting the stick controller 31A. For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 and 8-18, the component image ZA2 corresponding to the component A2 (rear base 604) includes the wiring C, the connector CN, the controller sensor unit 35A, and the push of the actual rear base 604. Since the display of the component image corresponding to the electronic component such as the sensor 35B is omitted (not displayed), the appearance of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 is impaired by the electronic component image corresponding to the electronic component such as the wiring C and the connector CN. Can be suppressed. The display of parts other than electronic parts may be omitted.

Further, in the effect pattern B, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 are displayed in order, and as shown in FIGS. 8-18 (E), (F), and (G), the component images ZA1 to ZA5 are more characteristic than the components A1 to A4. By displaying the component image ZA5 corresponding to the component A5 in a manner of assembling after the component images ZA1 to ZA4, the stick controller 31A can be suitably noticed and the stick controller 31A is most recognized. By displaying the easy-to-use part image ZA5 at the end, it is possible to make it difficult to predict what will be assembled until the end, which improves the interest.

Further, the component image ZA5 is displayed in a manner that is more visible to the player than the other component images ZA1 to ZA4. Specifically, the mode in which the visibility by the player is higher than that of the other part images ZA1 to ZA4 is, for example, a mode in which the part image ZA5 is assembled to the part image ZA1 as shown in FIG. 8-18 (E). When displaying with, the part image ZA5 is enlarged and highlighted, the effect image is displayed around the part image ZA5 to highlight it, or the image display device 5 is moved from the periphery to the center of the display area. It includes an aspect in which the player can easily identify the part as compared with other part images ZA1 to ZA4. And by displaying in this way, the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

Further, in the controller assembly effect, the effect patterns A and B for displaying the completed controller image Z1 by displaying the component images ZA2 to ZA5 in the form of assembling the component image ZA1 and the component image ZA5 are assembled on the component image ZA1. When the effect patterns A and B that include the effect patterns C and D that do not display the completed controller image Z1 and finally display the completed controller image Z1 are determined by displaying in a mode that is not attached. It is a big hit at a higher rate than the effect patterns C and D that do not display the finally completed controller image Z1. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to succeed (complete) the assembly production, which improves the interest.

Further, even if the variable display result is a big hit, the push button 31B may be determined as the operation target, or the effect patterns A and C in which the characteristic component A4 is not assembled at the end are selected. Or, since the production patterns C and D that are not completed due to the failure of the assembly may be selected in the end, the player's expectation for the big hit can be maintained regardless of which production pattern is selected. it can.

Further, in the feature unit 063SG, a mode in which one of the effect patterns A to D is selected as the effect pattern of the controller assembly effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of parts, the number of parts, and the like. It may be possible to select one from a plurality of effect patterns including other effect patterns having different component types, component assembly orders, and the like.

In the operation promotion effect pattern determination process of 063SGS279 in FIG. 8-8, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is valid based on the variable display result, and executes the controller assembly effect. Whether or not to execute, and when executing, which of the effect patterns A to D is executed is determined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), the effect control CPU 120 has an operation unit (operation) that enables the operation when the fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (when the variable display result is a jackpot). As a target), the stick controller 31A is determined at a rate of 80%, and the push button 31B is determined at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern is a loss fluctuation pattern (when the variable display result is a loss), the stick controller 31A is determined at a rate of 20% as the operation unit (operation target) for enabling the operation, and the push button 31B is used. Is determined at a rate of 80%. In this way, when the operation of the stick controller 31A becomes effective at the end of the battle effect, the jack controller 31A becomes a big hit at a higher rate than the operation of the push button 31B becomes effective, so that the stick controller 31A is more reliable than the push button 31B. The degree is high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B), when the operation target is determined to be the stick controller 31A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the non-execution of the controller assembly effect at a rate of 5%, and determines the effect pattern A. It is determined at a rate of 25%, the effect pattern B is determined at a rate of 60%, and the effect patterns C and D are determined at a rate of 5% each. On the other hand, when the operation target is determined to be the push button 31B, the non-execution of the controller assembly effect is determined at a rate of 20%, the effect patterns A and B are determined at a rate of 5% each, and the effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 50%. It is determined by the ratio, and the effect pattern D is determined by the ratio of 20%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 stores in the RAM 122 the type of the determined operation target, the presence / absence of execution of the controller assembly effect, and the type of the effect patterns A to D determined when the controller assembly effect is executed. The determination ratio is arbitrary and can be changed in various ways.

In this way, when the operation target is determined to be the stick controller 31A, the controller assembly effect is executed at a higher rate than the controller assembly effect is not executed, and the effect patterns A and B that succeed in assembling fail to assemble. While the effect patterns C and D are determined at a higher rate, when the operation target is determined to be the push button 31B, the controller assembly effect is not executed at a higher rate than when the operation target is determined to be the stick controller 31A. At the same time, even when the execution of the controller assembly effect is determined, the effect patterns C and D that fail to assemble are determined at a higher rate than the effect patterns A and B that succeed in assembling.

Therefore, if the controller assembly effect is executed and the assembly is successful, the jackpot will be higher than when the controller assembly effect is not executed or the assembly fails. In addition, when the controller assembly effect is not executed, the loss occurs at a higher rate than when the assembly is successful. That is, the effect patterns A and B that succeed in assembling have higher jackpot reliability than the effect patterns C and D that fail in assembly. Further, the effect pattern B that succeeds in assembling has a higher jackpot reliability than the effect pattern A that succeeds in assembling, and the effect pattern C that fails in assembly has a lower jackpot reliability than the effect pattern D that fails in assembly. Therefore, the jackpot reliability is set to be higher in the order of the effect pattern B, the effect pattern A, the effect pattern D, and the effect pattern C. The determination ratio is arbitrary and can be changed in various ways.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 is assembled when the variable display result is a big hit, the stick controller 31A is selected as the operation target at a higher ratio than the push button 31B, and the operation target is the stick controller 31A. Since the effect patterns A and B that succeed in assembling are selected at a higher rate than the effect patterns C and D that fail to assemble, if the controller assembly effect is successful and the operation of the stick controller 31A becomes effective, a big hit is obtained at a high rate. ..

Further, in the operation promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 (B), the operation promotion notification is sent by displaying the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3 at the start timing of the operation valid period. By performing the controller assembly effect before the operation promotion notification is performed, that is, before the operation valid period is started, the stick controller 31A for performing the operation can be focused on the player. Therefore, it is possible to notify in advance that the operation valid period will be started to a player or the like who has little experience in playing a game. Further, instead of displaying the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3 shown in FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 (B) over a predetermined period, the start timing of the operation valid period is determined by using the controller assembly effect. Since it becomes possible to raise awareness, it is possible to preferably improve the interest.

When the non-execution of the controller assembly effect is determined in the operation promotion effect pattern determination process, the controller assembly effect is not started even at the start timing of the controller assembly effect, and then FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8- By displaying the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3 as shown in 19 (B), the operation promotion notification is performed.

Further, the feature unit 063SG exemplifies a mode in which non-execution of the controller assembly effect may be determined in the operation promotion effect pattern determination process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the component images ZA1 to ZA1 Although ZA5 is displayed, it may be possible to select an effect pattern that does not display the mode in which these component images ZA1 to ZA5 are assembled, that is, displays the mode in which they are not assembled.

Further, after displaying the button component images corresponding to the components constituting the push button 31B, after starting the push button assembly effect of displaying the button component images in the form of assembling, the push button is pushed before or after the assembly is completed. By displaying the button image Z3 in a disassembled manner, it may have an effect pattern in which assembly fails.

Further, it may have an effect pattern in which the controller assembly effect is started and the assembly is successful to display the controller image Z1 after displaying the push button image Z3 in a disassembled manner.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (F) and 8-18 (G), after displaying the mode in which the final component images ZA4 and ZA5 are assembled, the assembled controller image Z1 is used for the game machine. The mode of assembling to the glass door frame or the like of the frame 3 may be displayed.

(Parts assembly production)
In the feature unit 063SG, the effect control CPU 120 displays a related effect image related to the effect image (controller image Z1 and push button image Z3) used for the operation promotion effect before starting the operation promotion effect in the super reach effect. After displaying in stages, either the promotion effect of the first aspect (operation promotion effect in which the controller image Z1 is displayed) or the promotion effect of the second aspect (operation promotion effect in which the push button image Z3 is displayed) It is possible to execute a component assembly effect that makes it possible to specify whether or not it will be executed.

The stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are composed of a plurality of parts (members) as described in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, and thus the stick controller 31A is configured in the parts assembly effect. The part images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to each of the five parts A1 to A5 among the plurality of parts and the part images ZC1 to ZC5 corresponding to each of the five parts C1 to C5 among the plurality of parts constituting the push button 31B are As related effect images related to the effect images (controller image Z1 and push button image Z3) used for the operation promotion effect, they are displayed step by step one by one during the execution period of the battle effect.

Then, when all or a part of the plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA5 related to the stick controller 31A is displayed in the component assembly effect, there is a high possibility that the operation of the stick controller 31A will be promoted in the subsequent operation promotion effect. It is suggested that when all or a part of the part images ZC1 to ZC5 related to the push button 31B is displayed, it is highly likely that the operation of the push button 31B is promoted in the subsequent operation promotion effect. To. That is, in the parts assembly effect executed before the operation promotion effect is executed, the operation is promoted by the operation promotion effect by displaying the part images ZA1 to ZA5 or the part images ZC1 to ZC5 in stages. The unit suggests (becomes identifiable) whether the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is used.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-14, when the effect control CPU 120 is displaying the battle effect image Z50 in the display area of the image display device 5, the battle effect image Z50 in the display area is displayed. In the specific display area Z51 above the above, a plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed one by one in order.

When displaying the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5, first of all, which of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 related to the stick controller 31A and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 related to the push button 31B is displayed. After displaying in a difficult-to-identify mode, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 related to the stick controller 31A and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 related to the push button 31B are changed to an identifiable mode. After that, the display mode is maintained.

As shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) and 8-11, specifically, both the component images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the stick controller 31A and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 corresponding to the push button 31B are displayed. The display mode changes in a plurality of stages (for example, four stages) according to the passage of time from the start of.

Each part image ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 have a black silhouette having a different outer shape and surface aspect from parts A1 to A5 of the stick controller 31A or parts C1 to C5 of the push button 31B in the first and second stages. It is displayed in a common silhouette mode in which white characters such as "?" Are displayed. The common silhouette mode is a mode that is commonly used when displaying a component image of either the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B.

In the third stage, the parts A1 to A5 of the stick controller 31A or the parts C1 to C5 of the push button 31B are displayed in a black individual silhouette embodiment. The individual silhouette mode is a non-common mode that is used individually when displaying the component image of the stick controller 31A and when displaying the component image of the push button 31B.

In the fourth stage, it is displayed in an icon mode representing the parts A1 to A5 of the stick controller 31A or the parts C1 to C5 of the push button 31B itself. In the fourth stage, parts A1 to A5 and parts C1 to C5 are shown in white, and parts A1 to A5 and parts C1 to C5 are shown in different colors (for example, red), and a flame is emitted around them. It is possible to display a special mode for displaying the effect image shown.

When the effect control CPU 120 displays each component image ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 in order, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of each component image in the order of the first stage, the second stage, the third stage, and the fourth stage. .. For example, the display mode of the part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 of the first stage may be gradually changed to the display modes of the part images of the second stage, the third stage, and the fourth stage by using the moving image display. Then, after displaying the parts images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 of the first stage, the parts images of the second stage, the third stage, and the fourth stage are switched (updated) every time a predetermined time elapses. The aspect may be changed.

As described above, in the first to third stages, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 identify the silhouette mode, that is, whether the player is the component image of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. Is displayed in a difficult identification mode, and in the fourth stage, the part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in a clear mode, that is, whether the player is a part image of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. It is displayed in an identifiable manner that can be identified. Therefore, from the start of displaying the part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 to the third stage, the player cannot predict which part image of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B will be displayed. Can attract interest in whether the part image of is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-11, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 as special effect images are the promotion effect of the first aspect (operation promotion effect in which the controller image Z1 is displayed) and the second aspect. As a mode in which it is difficult to identify which of the promotion effect (operation promotion effect in which the push button image Z3 is displayed) is executed, the component images of the first to third stages are targeted, but the third stage As for the component image, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 of the stick controller 31A and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 of the push button 31B may be compared to each other so that they can be identified.

Here, to explain an example of the component assembly effect that displays the component images ZC1 to ZC5 of the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (A), the effect control CPU 120 first starts the battle effect. A horizontally long rectangular specific display area Z51 is displayed on the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5 at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed, and a component image ZC1 is displayed on the left side of the specific display area Z51 in a common silhouette mode of a black circle. Display with (1st stage). Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (B), the part image ZC1 is changed from a black circular shape to a black non-circular common silhouette mode (second stage), and as shown in FIG. 8-14 (C). After displaying the part image ZC1 in the individual silhouette mode (third stage), the part image ZC1 is displayed in the icon mode as shown in FIG. 8-14 (D) (fourth stage).

Further, when the part image ZC1 is displayed in the icon mode, the next part image ZC2 is displayed in the common silhouette mode of the black circle (first stage), and the display mode is displayed from the first stage in the same manner as the part image ZC1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (FIGS. 8-14 (D) to (G)). Further, when the part image ZC2 is displayed in the icon mode, the next part image ZC3 is displayed in the common silhouette mode of the black circle (first stage), and the display mode is displayed from the first stage in the same manner as the part image ZC1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (FIGS. 8-14 (G) to (J)). Further, when the part image ZC3 is displayed in the icon mode, the next part image ZC4 is displayed in the common silhouette mode of the black circle (first stage), and the display mode is displayed from the first stage in the same manner as the part image ZC1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (FIGS. 8-14 (J) to (M)). Further, when the part image ZC4 is displayed in the icon mode, the next part image ZC5 is displayed in the common silhouette mode of the black circle (first stage), and the display mode is displayed from the first stage in the same manner as the part image ZC1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (Fig. 8-14 (M)-(Q)).

As shown in FIGS. 8-14 (M) to (Q), the last part image ZC5 is displayed in a common silhouette mode of a black circle (first stage), and the display mode is displayed in the same manner as the part image ZC1. When changing from the 1st stage to the 4th stage, by highlighting such as blinking around the part image ZC5, it changes to the 4th stage and creates an effect that fuels whether or not the assembly is successful. You may.

In this way, the display mode of each component image ZC1 to ZC5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 changes from the first stage to the fourth stage, and the number of component images ZC1 to ZC5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 changes. As the number increases, the display mode of the component images ZC1 to ZC5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 changes stepwise. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (Q), when the component image ZC5 is displayed in the icon mode, all the component images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed, and the assembly of the components is successful. On the other hand, for example, in FIGS. 8-14 (J) (K), after the part image ZC4 is displayed in the silhouette mode, the part image ZC4 disappears while changing to the individual silhouette mode, so that the part images ZC4 and ZC5 May not be displayed and the assembly of parts may fail.

Further, explaining the component set effect for displaying the component images ZA1 to ZA5 of the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (A), the effect control CPU 120 first has a predetermined time after the battle effect is started. A horizontally long rectangular specific display area Z51 is displayed in the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5, and the part image ZA1 is displayed in a black circular common silhouette mode on the left side of the specific display area Z51. (First stage). Next, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (B), the part image ZA1 is changed from a black circular shape to a black non-circular common silhouette mode (second stage), and as shown in FIG. 8-15 (C). After displaying the part image ZA1 in the individual silhouette mode (third stage), the part image ZA1 is displayed in the icon mode as shown in FIG. 8-15 (D) (fourth stage).

Further, when the part image ZA1 is displayed in the icon mode, the next part image ZA2 is displayed in the common silhouette mode of the black circle (first stage), and the display mode is displayed from the first stage in the same manner as the part image ZA1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (FIGS. 8-15 (D) to (G)). Further, when the part image ZA2 is displayed in the icon mode, the next part image ZA3 is displayed in the common silhouette mode of the black circle (first stage), and the display mode is displayed from the first stage in the same manner as the part image ZA1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (Figs. 8-15 (G) to (J)). Further, when the part image ZA3 is displayed in the icon mode, the next part image ZA4 is displayed in the common silhouette mode of the black circle (first stage), and the display mode is displayed from the first stage in the same manner as the part image ZA1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (FIGS. 8-15 (J) to (M)). Further, when the part image ZA4 is displayed in the icon mode, the next part image ZA5 is displayed in the common silhouette mode of the black circle (first stage), and the display mode is displayed from the first stage in the same manner as the part image ZA1. It is changed up to the 4th stage (Figs. 8-15 (M) to (Q)).

In this way, the display mode of each component image ZA1 to ZA5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 changes from the first stage to the fourth stage, and the number of component images ZA1 to ZA5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 changes. As the number increases, the display mode of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 changes stepwise. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (Q), when the part image ZA5 is displayed in the icon mode, all the part images ZA1 to ZA5 are displayed, and the assembly of the parts is successful. On the other hand, for example, in FIGS. 8-15 (J) and 8-15 (K), after the part image ZA4 is displayed in the silhouette mode, the part image ZA4 disappears while changing to the individual silhouette mode, so that the part images ZA4 and ZA5 May not be displayed and the assembly of parts may fail.

In the present embodiment, when the part images ZA1 to ZA5 or the part images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed stepwise, one part image is displayed and changed from the first stage to the fourth stage, and then another. Although the form of displaying the component images in order has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and after displaying one component image, it is possible to identify which component image is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. While changing to the second stage or the third stage where it is difficult, other part images are changed to the second stage or the third stage in the same way, and it is displayed at the timing when a predetermined number of part images are displayed. The display mode of at least a part of the plurality of component images may be changed up to the fourth stage. By doing so, it is not possible to know which of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is displayed until a predetermined number of component images are displayed, so that the player's interest can be maintained. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, in the component assembly effect, the embodiment in which the component images ZA1 to ZA5 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in the specific display area Z51 which is a part of the display area of the image display device 5 is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the display is performed in a display area other than the display area of the image display device 5 (for example, a sub-image display device provided separately from the image display device 5). May be good.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), the effect control CPU 120 performs the component set effect on a plurality of effect patterns PT1-1 to PT2-1 and PT2-1 having different changes in the type of the component image and the display mode of the component image. It is feasible based on any of ~ 3.

The effect pattern PT1-1 gradually changes in the order of the common silhouette, the individual silhouette, and the icon for the part images ZC1 to ZC3 of the push button 31B, but finally the part images ZC4 and 5 are not displayed and are assembled. Is a pattern that fails. The effect pattern PT1-2 changes stepwise in the order of common silhouette, individual silhouette, and icon for the part images ZC1 to ZC5 of the push button 31B, and finally all the part images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed and the assembly is successful. It is a pattern. The effect pattern PT1-3 changes stepwise in the order of common silhouette, individual silhouette, and icon (effect mode) for the component images ZC1 to ZC5 of the push button 31B, and finally all the component images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed. This is a pattern in which the set is successful.

The effect pattern PT2-1 changes stepwise in the order of common silhouette, individual silhouette, and icon for the component images ZA1 to ZA3 of the stick controller 31A, but finally the component images ZA4 and ZA5 are not displayed and are assembled. Is a pattern that fails. The effect pattern PT2-2 changes stepwise in the order of common silhouette, individual silhouette, and icon for the part images ZA1 to ZA5 of the stick controller 31A, and finally all the part images ZA1 to ZA5 are displayed and the assembly is successful. It is a pattern. The effect pattern PT2-3 changes stepwise in the order of common silhouette, individual silhouette, and icon (effect mode) for the component images ZA1 to ZA5 of the stick controller 31A, and finally all the component images ZA1 to ZA5 are displayed. This is a pattern in which the set is successful.

After finishing the operation promotion effect pattern determination process of 063SGS279 in FIG. 8-8, the effect control CPU 120 determines the component set effect pattern in the 063SGS280 based on the determination result in the operation promotion effect pattern determination process. Perform decision processing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), the effect control CPU 120 determines which of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is the operation target of the operation promotion effect in the operation promotion effect pattern determination process of 063SGS279. Depending on the height, one of a plurality of component assembly effect patterns is determined.

Specifically, when the stick controller 31A is determined as the operation target of the operation promotion effect, the non-execution of the parts assembly effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the effect pattern PT1-1 is determined at a rate of 3%. , The effect pattern PT1-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, the effect pattern PT1-3 is determined at a rate of 7%, the effect pattern PT2-1 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the effect pattern PT2-2 is determined at a rate of 30. It is determined at a rate of%, and the effect pattern PT2-3 is determined at a rate of 40%.

On the other hand, when the push button 31B is determined as the operation target of the operation promotion effect, the non-execution of the parts assembly effect is determined at a rate of 20%, the effect pattern PT1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the effect pattern is determined. PT1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, effect pattern PT1-3 is determined at a rate of 15%, effect pattern PT2-1 is determined at a rate of 7%, and effect pattern PT2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. The production pattern PT2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

Then, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the component set effect, the component set effect execution decision flag is set, and the types of the determined effect patterns PT1-1 to PT2-3 are stored in the RAM 122. The determination ratio is arbitrary and can be changed in various ways.

In this way, when the stick controller 31A is determined as the operation target of the operation promotion effect, the effect patterns PT2-1 to PT2-3 for displaying the component images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the stick controller 31A are displayed on the push button 31B. When the push button 31B is determined as the operation target of the operation promotion effect, the push button 31B is determined at a higher ratio than the effect patterns PT1-1 to PT1-3 for displaying the component images ZC1 to ZC5 corresponding to the above. The effect patterns PT1-1 to PT1-3 for displaying the corresponding component images ZC1 to ZC5 are determined at a higher ratio than the effect patterns PT2-1 to PT2-3 for displaying the component images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the stick controller 31A. To do.

In this way, in the component assembly effect, which of the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 is the effect image displayed in the operation promotion effect, that is, the operation target in the operation promotion effect is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. This is an effect suggesting which one is used by gradually displaying the component images ZA1 to ZA5 related to the controller image Z1 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 related to the push button image Z3.

Further, when the stick controller 31A is determined as the operation target of the operation promotion effect, it is highly possible that the execution of the controller assembly effect is determined, so that all the component images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the stick controller 31A are displayed. The effect patterns PT2-2 and PT2-3 in which the set is successful are determined at a higher rate than the effect patterns PT2-1 in which the set fails. That is, when the component set effect of the set success based on the effect patterns PT2-2 and PT2-3 is executed, the operation is performed at a higher rate than when the component set effect of the set failure based on the effect pattern PT2-1 is executed. In the promotion effect, the operation of the stick controller 31A is promoted through the controller assembly effect.

Further, when the push button 31B is determined as the operation target of the operation promotion effect, the effect patterns PT1-1 and PT2-1 that fail to set are the effect patterns PT1-2, 1-3 and PT2- that succeed in the set. Since it is determined at a higher rate than 2, 2-3, when the parts assembly effect based on the effect pattern PT1-1 or PT2-1 that fails to set is executed, the push button image Z3 is displayed in the operation promotion effect. There is a high possibility that

Further, when the stick controller 31A is determined as the operation target of the operation promotion effect, the variable display result is likely to be a big hit. Therefore, the effect patterns PT1-1, PT1-2, PT1-3, PT2-1, When the execution rate increases in the order of PT2-2 and PT2-3 and the push button 31B is determined as the operation target of the operation promotion effect, there is a high possibility that the variable display result is lost, so the effect pattern PT2-3 , PT2-2, PT2-1, PT1-3, PT1-2, PT1-1 in that order. Therefore, the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot is set to increase in the order of the effect patterns PT1-1, PT1-2, PT1-3, PT2-1, PT2-2, and PT2-3.

In this way, when the stick controller 31A is determined as the operation target of the operation promotion effect, the parts assembly effect is determined to be executed at a higher rate than when the push button 31B is determined, but the push button 31B is determined. Is determined, the variable display result is lost, or the execution of the controller assembly effect is not determined.

Further, in the feature unit 063SG, the display mode of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 (special effect image) displayed in the specific display area Z51 in the component assembly effect is a special display mode (all in the specific display area Z51). When the component images ZA1 to ZA5 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed (the display mode of the set success) is changed, the operation of the stick controller 31A is promoted in the operation promotion effect at a higher rate than when the special display mode is not set. Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 (special effect image) displayed in the specific display area Z51 in the component assembly effect is defined. It is sufficient that the operation of the stick controller 31A can be promoted in the operation promotion effect when the special display mode is adopted. For example, when the special display mode is adopted, the operation is promoted at a higher rate than that of the push button 31B. It may be set so that the operation of the stick controller 31A is promoted in the production.

Returning to FIG. 8-8, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the component set effect execution flag is set after executing the component set effect pattern determination process on the 063SGS280 (063SGS281). When the parts set effect execution flag is set, the time until the start of the parts set effect is set in the parts set effect start waiting timer (063SGS282), the parts set effect execution decision flag is set, and the parts set effect execution flag is set. Is cleared (063SGS283). If the parts set effect execution flag is not set in 063SGS281, the process proceeds to 063SGS284 as it is. Then, the effect control pattern (process table) according to the content determined in the operation promotion effect pattern determination process is selected (063SGS284), and the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (063SGS285).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L and 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (063SGS286). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern specification command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, but the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (063SGS287). In addition, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (063SGS288). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal, whereby variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (063SGS289).

FIG. 8-12 is a flowchart showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 sets the respective values of the process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer to -1 (063SGS301, 063SGS302,063SGS303). In the effect control CPU 120, the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect is set (it is determined to perform the advance notice effect), or the flag for executing the advance notice effect is set (during the execution of the advance notice effect). If there is), the advance notice effect processing may be executed.

In 063SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timered out. If the process timer is out, the process data is switched (063SGS307). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table in the process timer (063SGS308). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (063SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer is not timer-out, the effect device (for effect) according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). The control of the component) is executed (063SGS309b).

Next, when the execution of the operation promotion effect is determined in the operation promotion effect pattern determination process of 063SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 promotes the operation based on the determined assembly effect pattern at the execution timing of the operation promotion effect. A process for executing the effect is performed (063SGS310). Further, when the execution of the parts set effect is determined in the parts set effect pattern determination process of 063SGS280, the process of executing the parts set effect based on the determined effect pattern is performed at the execution timing of the parts set effect ( 063SGS310a). Further, when the execution of the operation promotion effect is determined in the operation promotion effect pattern determination process of 063SGS279, the operation promotion effect is executed based on the determined assembly effect pattern at the execution timing of the operation promotion effect. (063SGS310).

Then, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display control timer is out of the timer (063SGS311). When the variable display control timer is out of the timer (063SGS311; Y), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed on the next display screen of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols (30 ms after the previous display switching of the decorative symbols). The image data of the screen to be used) is created and written in a predetermined area of VRAM (063SGS312). In this way, the image display device 5 realizes variable display control of the decorative pattern. The display control unit 123 sends a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. Output. In this way, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative symbol in the variation of the decorative symbol. Further, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (063SGS313).

If the variable display control timer is not timered out (063SGS311; N), after executing 063SGS313, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display time timer is timered out (063SGS314). If the variable display time timer is out of the timer, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (063SGS316). Even if the variable display time timer is not timer-out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (063SGS315; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is waited for per special figure. The value is updated according to (step S173) (063SGS316). Even if the variable display time timer is not out of the timer, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Therefore, for example, the fluctuation pattern specification command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between the boards. Is received, the variable display of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol).

In the process table used for the variable display control of the decorative symbol, the process data during the variable display of the decorative symbol is set. That is, the sum of the process timer setting values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative symbol. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n in the processing of 063SGS306 timers out, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the variable display control of the decorative symbol based on the process table is performed. finish.

(Launch operation promotion production)
The effect control CPU 120 launches the game ball so that the game ball flows down the second path K2 when the big hit game state or the time saving state is started in the launch operation promotion effect process of 063SGS162 shown in FIG. 8-7. The launch operation promotion effect A and the launch operation promotion effect B that encourage the user to do so are executed. In addition, when the time saving state ends and the game is controlled to the normal game state (low accuracy low base state), a left-handed notification is issued to urge the game ball to be launched so that the game ball flows down the first path K1. Execute.

An example of the effect executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the jackpot game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-20 and 8-21. FIG. 8-20 is a timing chart illustrating an example of the effect in the jackpot game state. FIG. 8-21 is a diagram illustrating a flow of production from the start of the jackpot game state to the control to the normal game state via the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 8-20, when the display result of the variable display becomes a big hit (for example, a non-probable variable big hit) in the normal gaming state (or the time saving state) (see FIG. 8-21 (A)), for effect control. The CPU 120 starts the big hit start effect (fanfare effect) at the timing Ta0 when it receives the effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state in the special figure hit wait process of 063SGS173 shown in FIG. 8-7. In the fanfare period (execution period of the jackpot opening preprocessing) from the timing Ta0 when the effect control command is received to the timing Ta2 when the round game is started, first, the jackpot start effect indicating that the jackpot has occurred is executed, and then the jackpot starts. At the timing Ta1 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the start effect, the launch operation promotion effect A for prompting the game ball to be launched so as to flow down the second path K2 is started (see FIG. 8-22). ).

In the launch operation promotion effect A, after executing the handle assembly effect described later, a right-handed notification indicating that the right-handed operation is performed from the timing Ta2 when the handle assembly effect ends to the timing Ta3 when the round game starts. I do.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the big hit middle effect (round effect) during the round game period (execution period of the big hit opening process) from the timing Ta2 when the fanfare period ends to the timing Ta4 when the round game ends (the big hit opening process). See FIG. 8-21 (B)). Then, in the ending period (execution period of the processing after opening the big hit) from the timing Ta4 at which the round game period ends to the timing Ta7 at which the big hit game state ends, first, the big hit ends and the time is shortened (chance time). After executing the jackpot end effect indicating that effect (see FIG. 8-21 (C)), the game ball flows down the second path K2 at the timing Ta5 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the effect during the round. The firing operation promotion effect B for prompting the firing of the game ball is started (see FIGS. 8-23 and 8-24).

In the launch operation promotion effect B, after executing the route assembly effect described later, a right-handed notification indicating that the right-handed operation is performed from the timing Ta6 at which the route assembly effect ends to the timing Ta7 at which the jackpot game state ends. I do.

In addition, the time saving state (low accuracy high base) from the timing Ta7 controlled to the low accuracy high base state after the big hit game state ends to the timing Ta8 in which the variable display is executed 100 times without a new big hit occurring. In the state), the effect image Z10 corresponding to the time saving state, the variable display image Z11 of the decorative pattern, the remaining fluctuation number image Z12 in the time saving state, and the notification image Z13 consisting of "right-handed" and "→" indicating right-handed. And are displayed (see FIG. 8-21 (D)).

After displaying the notification image Z14 indicating that the time saving state has ended at the timing Ta8 at which the 100th variable display has ended since the end of the jackpot game state (see FIG. 8-21 (E)), a predetermined period starts from the timing Ta8. Until the elapsed timing Ta9, "Please return to left-handed", "←" and the ball-hit operation handle that prompt the game ball to be launched (returned to left-handed) so that the game ball flows down the first path K1. In addition to displaying the notification image Z15 composed of the steering wheel image imitating 30, the left-handed notification (left-handed operation promotion effect) is performed by outputting the sound "Please return to left-handed" from the speakers 8L and 8R (Fig.). 8-21 (F)).

In this feature unit 063SG, the case where the non-probability change jackpot is controlled to the low probability high base state is described, but even when the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B is controlled to the high probability high base state. , The launch operation promotion effect A is executed at the start of the big hit, and the launch operation promotion effect B is executed at the end of the big hit, but even if the 100th variable display ends without the big hit occurring from the end of the big hit game state. Since the high accuracy and high base state continues, the left-handed notification (left-handed operation promotion effect) is not performed.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 performs left-handed notification (left-handed operation promotion effect), the steering wheel assembly effect described later is not executed.

(Handle assembly production)
Next, the handle assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect A will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-22. 8-22 are views for explaining the flow of the steering wheel assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect A, and FIGS. 8-22 are diagrams showing a right-handed notification.

As described in FIG. 8-4, the ball striking operation handle 30 is composed of a plurality of parts (members), and in the handle assembly effect, each of the four parts B1 to B4 of the plurality of parts is supported. Parts images to be displayed ZB1 to ZB4 are displayed in an assembling mode.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-22 (A) to 8-22 (E), the part image ZB1 corresponding to the part B1 is assembled to the door frame image Z16 corresponding to the glass door frame of the gaming machine frame 3. After displaying in the aspect, the component image ZB1 is displayed in the form of assembling the part image ZB2 corresponding to the part B2, and the part image ZB1 is displayed in the form of assembling the part image ZB3 corresponding to the part B3. By displaying the part image ZB4 corresponding to the part B4 on the image ZB1, the completed image ZB5 of the ball striking operation handle 30 in which all the part images ZB1 to ZB4 are finally displayed is displayed. is there.

In the right-handed notification, the handle image Z17 that rotates the hitting ball operation handle 30 to the right and the right arrow image Z18 corresponding to the right arrow on which the character information "right-handed!" Is displayed are displayed, and the speaker 8L , 8R outputs the voice "Please hit right". The effect control CPU 120 displays the right arrow image Z5 that prompts the right strike during the execution of the steering wheel assembly effect and the right strike notification.

Further, the assembly order of the component images ZB1 to ZB4 in the handle assembly effect is described with reference to FIG. 8-4 in order to clearly indicate to the player that the ball striking operation handle 30 is being assembled. Since the order is different from the actual assembly order in the manufacturing process, the effect of production can be enhanced. The assembly order of the component images ZB1 to ZB4 in the handle assembly effect may be the same as the actual assembly order in the manufacturing process.

Further, the component images ZB1 to ZB4 are images that do not include some of the plurality of components (members) constituting the ball striking operation handle 30. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-22, the component image ZB1 corresponding to the component B1 (handle base 720) includes the wiring C, the connector CN, the touch ring 728, and the handle sensor (not shown) of the actual handle base 720. Since the display of the electronic component image corresponding to the electronic component such as the single-shot switch 725 is omitted (not displayed), the appearance of the component images ZB1 to ZB4 is impaired by the component image corresponding to the component such as the wiring C and the connector CN. Can be suppressed. The display of parts other than electronic parts may be omitted.

Further, in the handle assembly effect, the part image ZB4 corresponding to the part B4, which is more characteristic than the parts B1 to B3, is displayed in a manner of assembling after the part images ZB1 to ZB3, which is suitable for the ball striking operation handle 30. By displaying the part image ZB4, which is the easiest to recognize that it is the hitting ball operation handle 30, at the end, it is possible to make it difficult to predict what will be assembled until the end. Is improved.

Further, the part image ZB4 may be displayed in a form having higher visibility by the player than the other part images ZB1 to ZB3. Specifically, a mode in which the visibility by the player is higher than that of the other part images ZB1 to ZB3 is, for example, when the part image ZB4 is displayed in a mode of assembling, the part image ZB4 may be enlarged and displayed, or the parts may be displayed. The player can highlight the effect image by displaying it around the image ZB4, move it from the periphery of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the center, and display the effect image more than other component images ZB1 to ZB3. Includes aspects that make it easy to identify parts. And by displaying in this way, the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

Further, in the handle assembly effect, the part images ZB1 to ZB4 are assembled to the door frame image Z16 by a procedure other than the above procedure, in addition to the effect pattern displayed in the manner of assembling the part images ZB1 to ZB4 to the door frame image Z16 in the above order. The effect pattern to be displayed in the mode may be included.

Further, also in the handle assembly effect, after all the part images ZB1 to ZB4 are not used and the assembly fails and the unfinished image of the ball striking operation handle 30 is displayed, the assembly is started again and the completed image ZB5 is displayed. You may try to do it.

(Route assembly production)
Next, the route assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect B will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-23. 8-23 are diagrams for explaining the flow of the route assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect B in FIGS. 8-23. 8-24 are diagrams in which (G) to (K) explain the flow of the flow effect of the game ball in the launch operation promotion effect B, and FIGS. 8-24 are diagrams showing the right-handed notification.

As described in FIG. 8-1, the second path K2 is configured by arranging a plurality of parts (members) on the game board 2 and the game board 2, and in the route assembly effect, these game boards The component images ZD1 to ZD4 corresponding to each of the four parts D1 to D4 out of the plurality of parts including 2 are displayed in a manner of being assembled to the game board image Z20 corresponding to the game board 2. In the following, the parts that make up the special variable winning ball device 7 are part D1, the parts that make up the variable winning ball device 6B are part D2, the parts that make up the passage gate 41 are part D3, and a part of the second path K2. The passage component (passage member) to be formed will be referred to as a component D4 and will be described.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 (A) to 8-23 (E), the effect control CPU 120 displays the component image ZD1 corresponding to the component D1 in a manner of assembling to the game board image Z20. The part image ZD2 corresponding to the part D2 is displayed on the game board image Z20 in the form of assembling, the part image ZD3 corresponding to the part D3 is attached to the game board image Z20, and the part is displayed on the game board image Z20. By displaying the component image ZD4 corresponding to D4 in an assembled manner, at least a part of the path image corresponding to the second path K2 (for example, the game board image Z20 and the component images ZD1 to ZD4) is finally used. It is an effect to display the route image).

In addition, the assembly order of the component images ZD1 to ZD4 in these path assembly effects is the actual assembly in the manufacturing process in order to clearly indicate to the player that the second path K2 is being assembled. Since the order is different from the order, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. The assembly order of the component images ZD1 to ZD4 in the route assembly effect may be the same as the actual assembly order in the manufacturing process.

Further, the part D4 {passage part (passage member)} is actually formed integrally with the center decorative frame 5c, but in the route assembly effect, the part is formed separately from the center decorative frame 5c. By displaying it as the image ZD4, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, the component images ZD1 to ZD4 are images that do not include some of the plurality of components (members) constituting the second path K2. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-23, the component image ZD1 corresponding to the component D1 (special variable winning ball device 7), the component image ZD2 corresponding to the component D2 (variable winning ball device 6B), and the component D3 (passing gate 41). ) Corresponding to the component image ZD3, since the display of the electronic component image corresponding to the electronic component such as the solenoid, the switch, the wiring, and the connector of each component is actually omitted (not displayed), the component images ZD1 to It is possible to prevent the appearance of the ZD4 from being spoiled by component images corresponding to components such as solenoids, switches, wirings, and connectors. The display of parts other than electronic parts may be omitted.

Further, in the route assembly effect, the component image ZC4 corresponding to the component D4, which is more characteristic than the components D1 to D3, is displayed in a manner of assembling after the component images ZD1 to ZD3, which is suitable for the second path K2. The part image ZD4, which is the easiest to recognize that it is the second path K2, is displayed at the end, which makes it difficult to predict what will be assembled until the end. Is improved. The "characteristic part" is a part that is most easily recognized (specified) by the player as a passage part (passage member) that constitutes a part of the second path K2.

Specifically, the part D4 (passage member) is described in A.I. Being a member constituting the path through which the game ball flows down, B. The shape should be easy to recall that it is a route, C.I. It is larger than the other parts D1 to D3 (the area occupied by the entire second path K2 is large), and D.I. It is a part that is placed in a position that stands out to the player. Includes parts and the like that satisfy at least one condition (for example, here, conditions A, B, etc.) of being a device that the player aims to win a prize. Therefore, for example, if the player is urged to win the variable winning ball device 6B, the part image ZD2 is displayed as a characteristic part in a manner of being assembled after the part images ZD1, ZD3, and ZD4. It may be.

Further, the pachinko game machine 1 including the game board 2 (game area Y) has a model-specific portion peculiar to the pachinko game machine 1, and the game board image Z20 corresponding to such a game board 2 and the game board image Z20 When the door frame image Z16 or the like corresponding to the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame is displayed in the route assembly effect or the handle assembly effect, it is preferable to omit at least a part of the model-specific portion.

The model-specific section is a game information display section that displays game information unique (unique) to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the number of prize balls, jackpot probability, model name (title name), etc.), obstacle nails, windmills, etc. Including obstacles, movable bodies for directing, decorative parts, etc., these are provided so as to be visible to the player in the game area Y. Therefore, when these are displayed in the route assembly effect, they correspond to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the model name (title name) is the same, but the gaming performance (specs) such as the number of prize balls and the jackpot probability is different. When executing a route assembly effect on a pachinko game machine or another pachinko game machine with a different model name (title name), information different from the actual one is provided to the player, which gives a sense of discomfort. The assembly effect cannot be used in common for multiple types of pachinko machines.

However, as shown in FIG. 8-23 (E), when displaying the game information image Z21 corresponding to the game information display unit on which the number of prize balls, the jackpot probability, the model name (title name), etc. are displayed, the above By displaying the game information in a mode that is difficult (or impossible) for the player to identify (for example, not displaying, blurring, filling, etc.), the same route assembly effect can be executed between a plurality of types of models.

Further, in the route assembly effect, in addition to the effect pattern displayed in the manner in which the component images ZD1 to ZD4 are assembled to the game board image Z20 in the above order, the part images ZD1 to ZD4 are assembled to the game board image Z20 by a procedure other than the above procedure. The effect pattern to be displayed in the mode may be included.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a route assembly effect for displaying the mode of assembling the part image ZD4 to the game board image Z20, displays the character image Z22 as shown in FIG. 8-23 (F), and then displays the character image Z22. As shown in FIGS. 8-24 (G) to 8-24, the route image corresponding to the second route K2 is displayed recognizable to the player, and the route image is displayed in a mode in which the game ball flows down. Start the flow production.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-24 (G), an image in which the game ball moves toward the right side is displayed on the upper part of the game area Y, and as shown in FIG. 8-24 (H), the game area Y is displayed. An image of the game ball moving downward is displayed on the right side of the above, and as shown in FIG. 8-24 (I), an image of the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 and moving toward the variable winning ball device 6B. Is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-24 (J), an image in which the game ball wins the variable winning ball device 6B is displayed. As a result, it is possible to recognizablely notify the player that the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and can win the variable winning ball device 6B by hitting right. When displaying an image in which these game balls move, an arrow image Z6 showing the flow path of the game balls is displayed in addition to the game balls.

The game board image Z20 shown in FIG. 8-24 (G) is a movable body image corresponding to the movable body 32 which is originally a model-specific portion (for example, a region shown by diagonal lines in FIG. 8-24 (G)). ), But the movable body 32 is displayed in a mode that is difficult (or impossible) for the player to identify (for example, a blurred image or a deformed image of the movable body 32). Further, the display of the movable body image corresponding to the movable body 32 which is the model-specific part may be omitted, or only the display of the characteristic part may be omitted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-24 (K), after displaying the character image Z22, as shown in FIG. 8-24 (L), in the right-handed hit notification, the hitting ball operation handle 30 is rotated to the right. The image Z17, the right arrow image Z18 corresponding to the right arrow on which the character information "Right-handed!" Is displayed, and the character image Z25 are displayed, and the sound "Right-handed" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Output. The effect control CPU 120 displays a right arrow image Z5 that prompts a right-handed strike during the route assembly effect and the right-handed strike notification.

As described above, in the launch operation promotion effect A and the launch operation promotion effect B, it is shown that the ball striking operation handle 30 is rotated to the right as shown in FIGS. 8-22 (F) and 8-24 (L). By displaying the steering wheel image Z17 and the right arrow image Z18, not only the right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) is performed, but also before the right-handed notification is performed, that is, before the start timing of the right-handed operation is reached. By performing the assembly effect and the route assembly effect, it is possible to draw attention to the hitting ball operation handle 30 for performing the right-handed operation to the player and the second path K2 in which the game ball flows down by right-handed hitting. It is possible to notify a player or the like who is inexperienced in advance that a right-handed operation is required. Further, instead of displaying the right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) image shown in FIGS. 8-22 (F) and 8-24 (L) for a predetermined period, the handle assembly effect and the route assembly effect are used. Since it is possible to be aware of the start timing of the right-handed operation, it is possible to preferably improve the interest.

In addition, it is conceivable to set a long jackpot fanfare period and ending period in advance so that the player does not get a large number of balls in a short time. ) And the right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) shown in FIG. 8-24 (L) for a long period of time, the effect will be delayed simply by displaying the same effect image continuously or repeatedly. However, by setting the execution of the handle assembly effect and the route assembly effect as the launch operation promotion effect A and the launch operation promotion effect B, the right to the player and the like so that the launch operation promotion effect does not appear to be delayed. It is possible to preferably notify that the start timing of the striking operation has arrived.

In addition, by setting a long execution period of the right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) without performing the handle assembly effect or the route assembly effect, the player is fully aware of the start timing of the right-handed operation. Although it is possible, if the right-handed notification image is displayed before the start timing of the right-handed operation, the right-handed operation is started before the start timing of the right-handed operation, and the player is wasted. However, by executing the handle assembly effect and the route assembly effect, it becomes possible to start the right-handed operation at a suitable timing while being aware of the start timing of the right-handed operation.

(First invention)
As described above, the feature unit 063SG includes the first invention shown below. That is, in a conventional game machine capable of playing a game by launching a game ball into the game area, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60565, for example, as a flow path flowing down the game area. An advantageous state having a first path and a second path different from the first path, and having a game ball flowing down the second path after the end of the jackpot game state, which is more advantageous than flowing down the first path. In those controlled by (time saving state, etc.), it is possible to perform a promotion effect (right-handed notification) that encourages the game ball to be launched so that the game ball flows down the second path before the advantageous state is started. There were things. In the game machine described in the above patent gazette, in the promotion effect, the effect is monotonous only by prompting the game ball to be launched so as to flow down the second path, so that it is not possible to improve the interest. was there. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve the interest
The gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game by launching a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball) into a gaming area (for example, a gaming area Y).
A launch operation unit (for example, a ball striking handle 30) for performing a launch operation of a game medium, and
A first path (for example, the first path K1) through which the game medium launched into the game area can flow down, a second path different from the first path (for example, the second path K2), and
The promotion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the launch operation promotion effect A at the start of the jackpot) capable of executing the promotion effect for prompting the launch operation of the game medium so that the game medium flows down the second path. Part) and
With
The launch operation unit is composed of a plurality of parts (for example, parts B1 to B4) including a first part (for example, part B1) and a second part (for example, part B4).
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect executing means includes a first component image (for example, component image ZB1) related to the first component and a second component image (for example, component image ZB4) related to the second component. Is displayed, and a specific part image (for example, the completed image ZB5) using at least a part of the first part image and the second part image can be displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a handle. FIG. 8 is a portion capable of displaying the completed image ZB5 of the ball striking operation handle 30 in which all the part images ZB1 to ZB4 are finally used by displaying the parts images ZB1 to ZB4 in the assembling effect in the assembly production. -See (A) to (E))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the launching operation unit can be preferably paid attention to, so that the interest can be improved.
Specifically, by performing the steering wheel assembly effect before executing the right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) shown in FIG. 8-22 (F), the right-handed operation is performed before the start timing of the right-handed operation. By making it possible for the player to be fully aware of the hitting ball operation handle 30 for performing the right-handed hitting operation, the player can perform the right-handed hitting operation without rushing when the start timing of the right-handed hitting operation is reached.
Further, in the steering wheel assembly effect, by displaying the part images ZB1 to ZB4, that is, by displaying the unfinished image, it is possible to make the player aware that the right-handed operation start timing has not been reached. Finally, by displaying the completed image ZB5 in which these component images are assembled, the right-handed operation can be started at a suitable timing.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game by launching a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball) into a gaming area (for example, a gaming area Y).
A launch operation unit (for example, a ball striking handle 30) for performing a launch operation of a game medium, and
A first path (for example, the first path K1) through which the game medium launched into the game area can flow down, a second path different from the first path (for example, the second path K2), and
The promotion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the launch operation promotion effect A at the start of the jackpot) capable of executing the promotion effect for prompting the launch operation of the game medium so that the game medium flows down the second path. Part) and
With
The launch operation unit is composed of a plurality of parts (for example, parts B1 to B4) including a first part (for example, part B1) and a second part (for example, part B4).
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect executing means can display a first component image related to the first component and a second component image related to the second component in order (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , A portion displayed in a manner in which part images ZB1 to ZB4 are sequentially assembled in the handle assembly effect. See FIGS. 8-22 (A) to (E).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the launching operation unit can be preferably paid attention to, so that the interest can be improved.
Specifically, by performing the steering wheel assembly effect before executing the right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) shown in FIG. 8-22 (F), the right-handed operation is performed before the start timing of the right-handed operation. By making it possible for the player to be fully aware of the hitting ball operation handle 30 for performing the right-handed hitting operation, the player can perform the right-handed hitting operation without rushing when the start timing of the right-handed hitting operation is reached.
Further, in the steering wheel assembly effect, the part images ZB1 to ZB4 are displayed in order, that is, each part image ZB1 to ZB4 is displayed individually and the completed image is not shown, so that the right-handed operation start timing is not reached. It is possible to make the player aware of this, and by finally displaying the completed image ZB5 in which these component images are assembled, the right-handed operation can be started at a suitable timing.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The plurality of components include a third component (for example, an electronic component such as a wiring C, a connector CN, a touch ring 728, a handle sensor (not shown), and a single-shot switch 725 included in the handle base 720).
The promotion effect executing means does not display a third component image related to the third component in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the component B1 (handle base 720) in the handle assembly effect. The component image ZB1 omits the display of the electronic component image corresponding to the electronic component such as the wiring C, the connector CN, the touch ring 728, the handle sensor (not shown), and the single-shot switch 725 of the actual handle base 720 (. (Not displayed) part.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the first component and the second component from being spoiled by the third component.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The second component (for example, component B4) is a component that is more characteristic than the first component (for example, component B1).
The promotion effect executing means displays the second component image after the first component image in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is more characteristic than the parts B1 to B3 in the handle assembly effect. A part in which the part image ZB4 corresponding to the part B4 is displayed in a manner of being assembled after the part images ZB1 to ZB3.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to give an impact and enhance the effect.
Specifically, it is possible to notify the player that the assembly of the hitting ball operation handle 30 has been completed, that is, that it is the start timing of the right-handed hitting operation in a display mode that is easy for the player to understand.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) has a model-specific part (for example, unique (specific) gaming information unique to the pachinko gaming machine 1) (for example, the number of prize balls, jackpot probability, model name (title name) ) Etc.) is displayed, it has an obstacle such as an obstacle nail or a windmill, a movable body for directing, a decorative part, etc.)
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect execution means may display a game area image related to the game area, and when displaying the game area image, at least a part of the model-specific portion is omitted. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the game board image Z20 corresponding to the game board 2 and the door frame image Z16 corresponding to the game machine frame 3 including the glass door frame in the route assembly effect and the handle assembly effect. When displaying, at least a part of the model-specific part is omitted.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the same promotion effect can be executed between a plurality of types of models.
Specifically, since the model-specific part is not displayed in the route assembly effect and the handle assembly effect, the same route assembly effect and handle assembly effect can be performed on different models of game machines without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. You will be able to do it.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
It is possible to execute a special promotion effect for prompting the game medium to be launched so that the game medium flows down the first path (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is left-handed notification based on the end of the time saving state. (See Figure 8-21 (F)),
In the special promotion effect, the first component image and the second component image are not displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes left-handed notification (left-handed operation promotion effect) based on the end of the time saving state. The part where the handle assembly effect is not executed before the operation. See FIG. 8-21 (F)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress annoyance.
Specifically, when the player is controlled to a state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state or a time saving state), a steering wheel assembly effect or a route assembly effect is performed, while the state that is advantageous to the player is controlled to a disadvantageous state. When this is done, the player can be made aware that the game state has changed by not performing the handle assembly effect or the route assembly effect.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6.
The promotion effect executing means displays in the mode of assembling the first component image and the second component image in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 comprises a plurality of ball striking operation handles 30. Parts image corresponding to each of the four parts B1 to B4 Of the parts A part capable of executing a handle assembly effect displayed in a mode of assembling ZB1 to ZB4.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.
Specifically, not only the images of a plurality of parts are shown, but also the player can be suitably notified that the right-handed operation start timing is reached by completing the ball striking operation handle 30 by assembling.

The gaming machine of the means 8 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to the means 7.
In the manufacturing process of the game machine, the first part and the second part are assembled to other parts according to a predetermined procedure.
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect executing means displays the first part image and the second part image in a mode different from the predetermined procedure (for example, the part image ZB1 in the handle assembly effect). The assembly order of the ZB4 is the same as the actual assembly order in the manufacturing process described in FIG. 8-4 in order to clearly indicate to the player that the ball striking handle 30 is being assembled. Are in a different order.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, it can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

The gaming machine of the means 9 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to the means 7 or 8.
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect executing means displays the first component image and the second component image in a mode of assembling them, and then launches the game medium with the operation component image corresponding to the launch operation unit. It can be displayed in the mode (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 performs the handle assembly effect and the route assembly effect, the ball striking operation handle as shown in FIGS. 8-22 (F) and 8-24 (L). A part for performing right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) by displaying a handle image Z17 and a right arrow image Z18 indicating that 30 is rotated to the right.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of production can be enhanced.
More specifically, it is possible to provide the player with the timing to start the right-handed operation in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Second invention)
Further, the feature unit 063SG includes the second invention shown below. That is, in a conventional game machine capable of playing a game by launching a game ball into the game area, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60565, for example, as a flow path flowing down the game area. An advantageous state having a first path and a second path different from the first path, and having a game ball flowing down the second path after the end of the jackpot game state, which is more advantageous than flowing down the first path. In those controlled by (time saving state, etc.), it is possible to perform a promotion effect (right-handed notification) that encourages the game ball to be launched so that the game ball flows down the second path before the advantageous state is started. There were things. In the game machine described in the above patent gazette, in the promotion effect, the effect is monotonous only by prompting the game ball to be launched so as to flow down the second path, so that it is not possible to improve the interest. was there. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve the interest
The gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game by launching a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball) into a gaming area (for example, a gaming area Y).
A first path (for example, the first path K1) through which the game medium launched into the game area can flow down, a second path different from the first path (for example, the second path K2), and
The promotion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the launch operation promotion effect A at the start of the jackpot) capable of executing the promotion effect for prompting the launch operation of the game medium so that the game medium flows down the second path. Part) and
With
The second path is composed of a plurality of parts including a first part (for example, a game board 2) and a second part (for example, parts D1 to D4).
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect executing means has a first component image (for example, a game board image Z20) related to the first component and a second component image (for example, component images ZD1 to) related to the second component. ZD4) can be displayed, and a specific part image (for example, a route image) using at least a part of the first part image and the second part image can be displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120). In the route assembly effect, by displaying the component images ZD1 to ZD4 in the mode of assembling the game board image Z20, the path image finally corresponding to the second path K2 (for example, the game board image Z20 and the part image ZD1). A portion capable of displaying a path image) using at least a part of ~ ZD4. See FIGS. 8-23 (A) to (E)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the second route can be preferably focused on, so that the interest can be improved.
Specifically, by performing the route assembly effect before executing the right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) shown in FIG. 8-24 (L), the right-handed operation is performed before the start timing of the right-handed operation is reached. By making it possible for the player to be fully aware of the second path K2 in which the game ball flows down, the player can perform the right-handed operation without rushing when the start timing of the right-handed operation is reached. Become.
Further, in the route assembly effect, by displaying the part images ZD1 to ZD4, that is, by displaying the unfinished image, it is possible to make the player aware that the right-handed operation start timing has not been reached. By displaying an image in which a plurality of component images ZD1 to ZD4 are assembled on the game board image Z20, the right-handed operation can be started at a suitable timing.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game by launching a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball) into a gaming area (for example, a gaming area Y).
A first path (for example, the first path K1) through which the game medium launched into the game area can flow down, a second path different from the first path (for example, the second path K2), and
The promotion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the launch operation promotion effect A at the start of the jackpot) capable of executing the promotion effect for prompting the launch operation of the game medium so that the game medium flows down the second path. Part) and
With
The second path is composed of a plurality of parts including a first part (for example, a game board 2) and a second part (for example, parts D1 to D4).
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect executing means can display a first component image related to the first component and a second component image related to the second component in order (for example, the effect control CPU 120). , A portion displayed in a mode in which component images ZD1 to ZD4 are sequentially assembled in the route assembly effect. See FIGS. 8-23 (A) to (E).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the launching operation unit can be preferably paid attention to, so that the interest can be improved.
Specifically, by performing the route assembly effect before executing the right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) shown in FIG. 8-24 (L), the right-handed operation is performed before the start timing of the right-handed operation. By making it possible for the player to be fully aware of the hitting ball operation handle 30 for performing the right-handed hitting operation, the player can perform the right-handed hitting operation without rushing when the start timing of the right-handed hitting operation is reached.
Further, in the route assembly effect, the part images ZD1 to ZD4 are displayed in order, that is, each part image ZD1 to ZD4 is displayed individually and the completed image is not shown, so that the right-handed operation start timing is not reached. It is possible to make the player aware of this, and by displaying an image in which a plurality of component images ZD1 to ZD4 are assembled on the game board image Z20, the right-handed operation can be started at a suitable timing.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The plurality of parts include a third part (for example, electronic parts such as solenoids, switches, wirings, connectors, etc.).
The promotion effect executing means does not display the third component image related to the third component in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has the component image ZD1 corresponding to the components D1 to D4 in the route assembly effect. In the ZD4 and the game board image Z20, the display of the electronic component image corresponding to the electronic component such as the solenoid, switch, wiring, and connector of each component is omitted (not displayed).)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the first component and the second component from being spoiled by the third component.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The second part is a more characteristic part than the first part.
The promotion effect executing means displays the second component image after the first component image in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is more characteristic than the parts D1 to D3 in the route assembly effect. A part in which the component image ZD4 corresponding to the component D4 is displayed in a manner of being assembled after the component images ZD1 to ZD3.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to give an impact and enhance the effect.
Specifically, it is possible to notify the player that the assembly of the second path K2 has been completed, that is, that it is the start timing of the right-handed operation, in a display mode that is easy for the player to understand.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) has a model-specific part (for example, unique (specific) gaming information unique to the pachinko gaming machine 1) (for example, the number of prize balls, jackpot probability, model name (title name) ) Etc.) is displayed, it has an obstacle such as an obstacle nail or a windmill, a movable body for directing, a decorative part, etc.)
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect execution means may display a game area image related to the game area, and when displaying the game area image, at least a part of the model-specific portion is omitted. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the game board image Z20 corresponding to the game board 2 and the door frame image Z16 corresponding to the game machine frame 3 including the glass door frame in the route assembly effect and the handle assembly effect. When displaying, at least a part of the model-specific part is omitted.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the same promotion effect can be executed between a plurality of types of models.
Specifically, since the model-specific part is not displayed in the route assembly effect and the handle assembly effect, the same route assembly effect and handle assembly effect can be performed on different models of game machines without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. You will be able to do it.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
It is possible to execute a special promotion effect for prompting the game medium to be launched so that the game medium flows down the first path (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is left-handed notification based on the end of the time saving state. The viable part.),
In the special promotion effect, the first component image and the second component image are not displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes left-handed notification (left-handed operation promotion effect) based on the end of the time saving state. The part where the handle assembly effect is not executed before the operation. See FIG. 8-21 (F)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress annoyance.
Specifically, when the player is controlled to a state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state or a time saving state), a steering wheel assembly effect or a route assembly effect is performed, while the state that is advantageous to the player is controlled to a disadvantageous state. When this is done, the player can be made aware that the game state has changed by not performing the handle assembly effect or the route assembly effect.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6.
The plurality of parts include a common part (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. 1) through which both the game medium flowing down the first path and the game medium flowing down the second path can pass. ,
The promotion effect executing means can display a common part image corresponding to the common part (for example, a part image corresponding to the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. 1) in the promotion effect (modification example).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform an effect including parts common to the first path and the second path.
Specifically, for example, as in the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. 1, a component provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first path K1 and a game ball flowing down the second path K2 can win a prize. Can also be used for route assembly production.

The gaming machine of means 8 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7.
After the promotion effect executing means executes the promotion effect, the second path image corresponding to the second path is recognizable to the player, and the second path image is flowed down by the game medium. It is possible to display (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 performs the route assembly effect, as shown in FIGS. 8-24 (G) to (J), the route image corresponding to the second path K2 is displayed to the player. A part capable of performing a flow-down effect in which the path image is displayed in a recognizable manner and the game ball flows down.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of production can be enhanced.
Specifically, it is possible to urge the player to perform an operation of launching a game ball on the second path K2 assembled by the route assembly effect.

The gaming machine of means 9 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8.
The promotion effect executing means displays in the mode of assembling the first component image and the second component image in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 constitutes a second path K2). Part image corresponding to each of the four parts D1 to D4 Of the parts A part capable of executing a route assembly effect displayed in a mode of assembling ZD1 to ZD4.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.
Specifically, not only the images of a plurality of parts are shown, but also the player can be suitably notified that the right-handed operation start timing is reached by completing the second path K2 by assembling.

The gaming machine of the means 10 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to the means 9.
In the manufacturing process of the game machine, the first part and the second part are assembled to other parts according to a predetermined procedure.
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect executing means displays the first component image and the second component image in a procedure different from the predetermined procedure (for example, the component image ZD1 in the route assembly effect). The assembling order of the ZD4 is different from the actual assembling order in the manufacturing process in order to clearly indicate to the player that the second path K2 is being assembled. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, it can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

The gaming machine of the means 11 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to the means 9 or 10.
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect executing means displays the first component image and the second component image in a mode of assembling them, and then launches the game medium with the operation component image corresponding to the launch operation unit. It can be displayed in the mode (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 performs the handle assembly effect and the route assembly effect, the ball striking operation handle as shown in FIGS. 8-22 (F) and 8-24 (L). A part for performing right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) by displaying a handle image Z17 and a right arrow image Z18 indicating that 30 is rotated to the right.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of production can be enhanced.
More specifically, it is possible to provide the player with the timing to start the right-handed operation in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Third invention)
Further, the feature unit 063SG includes the third invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a pachinko gaming machine which is an example of a gaming machine, for example, in a gaming machine provided with a predetermined member that can be operated by a player and a display means, for example, it is described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-15392. For example, before the operation validity period of the chance button as a predetermined member is started, an image corresponding to the chance button and having a transmittance of 50% is displayed from the left and right sides of the display means. By moving and displaying toward the center and displaying the button image corresponding to the chance button when the two button transparent images overlap in the center, it notifies that the operation validity period of the chance button has started. There was something to do. The gaming machine described in the above patent gazette has a problem that it cannot improve the interest. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve the interest
The gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined member (for example, stick controller 31A / push button 31B / movable body 32, etc.) is provided.
The predetermined member is a plurality of parts (for example, parts A1 to A5) including a first part (for example, part A1), a second part (for example, part A5), and a third part (for example, part A2). Configured
When the predetermined member becomes available, the predetermined member image related to the predetermined member can be displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the predetermined member image in FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 in the operation promotion effect. As shown in (B), a portion for performing an operation promotion notification by displaying the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3 when the operation valid period is started.),
Before displaying the predetermined member image, the first component image related to the first component and the second component image related to the second component are displayed, but the third component image related to the third component is displayed. Is not displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has the wiring C, the connector CN, the controller sensor unit 35A, and the component image ZA2 corresponding to the component A2 (rear base 604) in the controller assembly effect. The part where the display of the component image corresponding to the electronic component such as the push sensor 35B is omitted (not displayed).)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a predetermined member can be preferably focused on, so that the interest is improved. Further, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the first component and the second component from being spoiled by the third component.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined member (for example, the stick controller 31A) is a member that constitutes a part of a detecting means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a gripping member 602L, 602R, etc.) capable of detecting the movement of the player.
It is provided with a promotion effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute an operation promotion effect that promotes the operation of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B) that can execute the promotion effect that promotes the movement of the player.
The promotion effect executing means can display the first component image and the second component image in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has five components out of a plurality of components in the controller assembly effect. Parts image corresponding to each of A1 to A5 A part to be displayed in the manner of assembling ZA1 to ZA5.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the effect of the promotion effect.
By performing the controller assembly effect, it is possible to make the player fully aware of the stick controller 31A to be operated by the time the operation valid period of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is started. The player will be able to operate without panic when the start timing of the operation valid period is reached.
Further, in the controller assembly effect, the part images ZA1 to ZA4 are displayed in order, that is, each part image ZA1 to ZA4 is displayed individually and the completed image is not shown, so that the start timing of the operation valid period is not reached. It is possible to make the player aware of this, and by displaying an image in which a plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA4 are assembled, the operation can be started at an appropriate timing.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The predetermined member (for example, the movable body 32) is movable and can be operated.
It is possible to operate the predetermined member when displaying the first component image and the second component image (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has an image as shown in FIG. 8-30 (A). The part image ZA1 corresponding to the controller assembly effect is displayed on the left side of the display area of the display device 5, and the part image ZE1 corresponding to the movable body assembly effect is displayed on the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. As shown in 8-30 (B), a portion in which the controller assembly effect and the movable body assembly effect are advanced together and the movable body 32 is moved up and down in the vicinity of the origin position. Modification 5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the predetermined member is operated, the predetermined member can be preferably paid attention to.
Specifically, the player's expectation that the movable body 32 moves to the effect position can be suitably improved before the movement timing of the movable body 32.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The predetermined member includes a first predetermined member (for example, a stick controller 31A) and a second predetermined member (for example, a push button 31B).
Before displaying the predetermined member image, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting whether the predetermined member image related to the first predetermined member or the second predetermined member is displayed (for example, for effect control). A portion where the CPU 120 can execute an assembly suggestion effect suggesting which of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is assembled and the operation is effective in the super reach effect. See Modification 2 of FIG. 8-26. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is suggested which predetermined member is displayed, so that the interest is improved.
Specifically, it is possible to preferably improve the player's expectation as to which operation member the operation is effective before the operation effective period is started.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
Before displaying the predetermined member image, the first component image and the second component image are displayed in an assembling manner (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is among a plurality of components constituting the stick controller 31A). Parts image corresponding to each of the five parts A1 to A5 A part capable of executing a controller assembly effect displayed in a mode of assembling ZA1 to ZA5.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.
Specifically, not only the images of a plurality of parts are shown, but also the player can be suitably notified that the start timing of the operation valid period is reached by completing the stick controller 31A by assembling.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 5.
A first display pattern displayed in a mode in which the first component image and the second component image are assembled, and
A second pattern displayed in a manner in which the first component image and the second component image are not assembled, and
(For example, the controller image Z1 completed by displaying the component images ZA2 to ZA5 in the mode in which the effect control CPU 120 attaches the component images ZA2 to ZA5 to the component image ZA1 in the controller assembly effect. A controller based on any of the effect patterns A and B for displaying the above and the effect patterns C and D for not displaying the completed controller image Z1 by displaying the part image ZA5 in a manner not assembled to the part image ZA1. The part where the assembly effect can be executed. See Fig. 8-8)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.
Specifically, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that all the parts are assembled and the assembly is completed.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6.
Before displaying a plurality of component images including the first component image and the second component image in an assembling mode, it is possible to execute a special effect of displaying the component image used for the assembling (for example,). A portion in which an assembly suggestion effect can be executed, which is displayed in a mode of collecting images of parts assembled in the controller assembly effect, such as during a super reach effect before the controller assembly effect is executed. See Modification 2 of FIG. 8-26. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.
Specifically, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the assembly is completed by the controller assembly effect before executing the controller assembly effect.

(Fourth Invention)
Further, the feature unit 063SG includes the fourth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a pachinko gaming machine which is an example of a gaming machine, for example, in a gaming machine provided with a predetermined member that can be operated by a player and a display means, for example, it is described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-15392. For example, before the operation validity period of the chance button as a predetermined member is started, an image corresponding to the chance button and having a transmittance of 50% is displayed from the left and right sides of the display means. By moving and displaying toward the center and displaying the button image corresponding to the chance button when the two button transparent images overlap in the center, it notifies that the operation validity period of the chance button has started. There was something to do. The gaming machine described in the above patent gazette has a problem that it cannot improve the interest. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve the interest
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined member (for example, stick controller 31A / push button 31B / movable body 32, etc.) is provided.
The predetermined member is composed of a plurality of parts including a first part (for example, part A1) and a second part (for example, part A5) that is more characteristic than the first part.
When the predetermined member becomes available, the predetermined member image related to the predetermined member can be displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the predetermined member image in FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 in the operation promotion effect. As shown in (B), a portion for performing an operation promotion notification by displaying the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3 when the operation valid period is started.),
Before displaying the predetermined member image, it is possible to display the first component image related to the first component and the second component image related to the second component.
The second component image is displayed after the first component image (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the component images ZA1 to ZA5 in order in the effect pattern B, and FIGS. 8-18. As shown in (E), (F), and (G), a portion for displaying the part image ZA5 corresponding to the part A5, which is more characteristic than the parts A1 to A4, in a manner of assembling after the part images ZA1 to ZA4. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a predetermined member can be preferably focused on, so that the interest is improved.
Specifically, it is possible to notify the player that the assembly of the stick controller 31A has been completed, that is, that the start timing of the operation valid period has come, in a display mode that is easy for the player to understand.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
When the second component image is displayed, it is displayed in a manner that is more visible to the player than the component image related to the other component (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 8-18 (E). As shown, when the component image ZA5 is displayed in the manner of being assembled to the component image ZA1, the component image ZA5 is enlarged and displayed, and the effect image is displayed around the component image ZA5 to highlight or display the image. A part that is displayed in a manner that makes it easier for the player to identify the part than other part images ZA1 to ZA4, such as moving the display from the peripheral edge of the display area of the device 5 toward the center.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of production can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The predetermined member (for example, the stick controller 31A) is a member that constitutes a part of a detecting means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a gripping member 602L, 602R, etc.) capable of detecting the movement of the player.
It is provided with a promotion effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute an operation promotion effect that promotes the operation of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B) that can execute the promotion effect that promotes the movement of the player.
The promotion effect executing means can display the first component image and the second component image in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has five components out of a plurality of components in the controller assembly effect. Parts image corresponding to each of A1 to A5 A part to be displayed in the manner of assembling ZA1 to ZA5.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the effect of the promotion effect.
Specifically, the operation validity period of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is started by performing the controller assembly effect before executing the operation promotion notification shown in FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 (B). By the time, the stick controller 31A to be operated can be made fully aware of the player, so that the player can operate the stick controller 31A without rushing when the start timing of the operation valid period is reached. Become.
Further, in the controller assembly effect, the part images ZA1 to ZA4 are displayed in order, that is, each part image ZA1 to ZA4 is displayed individually and the completed image is not shown, so that the start timing of the operation valid period is not reached. It is possible to make the player aware of this, and by displaying an image in which a plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA4 are assembled, the operation can be started at an appropriate timing.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The predetermined member (for example, the movable body 32) is movable and can be operated.
It is possible to operate the predetermined member when displaying the first component image and the second component image (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has an image as shown in FIG. 8-30 (A). The part image ZA1 corresponding to the controller assembly effect is displayed on the left side of the display area of the display device 5, and the part image ZD1 corresponding to the movable body assembly effect is displayed on the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. As shown in 8-30 (B), a portion in which the controller assembly effect and the movable body assembly effect are advanced together and the movable body 32 is moved up and down in the vicinity of the origin position. Modification 5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the predetermined member is operated, the predetermined member can be preferably paid attention to.
Specifically, the player's expectation that the movable body 32 moves to the effect position can be suitably improved before the movement timing of the movable body 32.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The predetermined member includes a first predetermined member (for example, a stick controller 31A) and a second predetermined member (for example, a push button 31B).
Before displaying the predetermined member image, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting whether the predetermined member image related to the first predetermined member or the second predetermined member is displayed (for example, for effect control). A portion where the CPU 120 can execute an assembly suggestion effect suggesting which of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is assembled and the operation is effective in the super reach effect. See Modification 2 of FIG. 8-26. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is suggested which predetermined member is displayed, so that the interest is improved.
Specifically, it is possible to preferably improve the player's expectation as to which operation member the operation is effective before the operation effective period is started.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
Before displaying the predetermined member image, the first component image and the second component image are displayed in an assembling manner (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is among a plurality of components constituting the stick controller 31A). Parts image corresponding to each of the five parts A1 to A5 A part capable of executing a controller assembly effect displayed in a mode of assembling ZA1 to ZA5.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.
Specifically, not only the images of a plurality of parts are shown, but also the player can be suitably notified that the start timing of the operation valid period is reached by completing the stick controller 31A by assembling.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 6.
A first display pattern displayed in a mode in which the first component image and the second component image are assembled, and
A second pattern displayed in a manner in which the first component image and the second component image are not assembled, and
(For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the completed controller image Z1 by displaying the component images ZA2 to ZA5 in the mode of assembling the component images ZA1 in the controller assembly effect. Controller assembly effect based on any of the effect patterns A and B to be performed and the effect patterns C and D that do not display the completed controller image Z1 by displaying the part image ZA5 in a manner not assembled to the part image ZA1. The part where can be executed. See Fig. 8-9 (C))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.
Specifically, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that all the parts are assembled and the assembly is completed.

The gaming machine of means 8 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7.
Before displaying the plurality of component images including the first component image and the second component image in an assembling mode, it is possible to execute a special effect of displaying the component image used for the assembling (for example,). A part in which a parts assembly effect that is displayed in a mode of collecting images of parts assembled in the controller assembly effect can be executed during a super reach effect before executing the controller assembly effect. See Modification 2 of FIG. 8-26. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.
Specifically, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the assembly is completed by the controller assembly effect before executing the controller assembly effect.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of the operation promotion effect, a mode in which the controller assembly effect for assembling the stick controller 31A is executed has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the controller assembly effect. , The push button assembly effect for assembling the push button 31B may be executed. Further, either the controller assembly effect or the push button assembly effect may be selected and executed, or both the controller assembly effect and the push button assembly effect may be started together. When either the controller assembly effect or the push button assembly effect is selected and executed, when the operation target is the stick controller 31A, the controller assembly effect is selected at a higher rate than the push button assembly effect, while the operation target. When is the push button 31B, it is preferable to select the push button assembly effect at a higher rate than the controller assembly effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation promotion effect including the controller assembly effect is exemplified at the timing of determining the confrontation result of the battle effect in the super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. , Timing to notify whether re-variation is executed in pseudo-continuous production, various timings in advance notice production suggesting the possibility of big hit, timing to notify whether to be promoted to probability fluctuation big hit in promotion production Other effects such as the timing to notify whether the round will continue during the big hit and the timing to notify whether the game ball will pass through the probability change switch and be controlled to the probability fluctuation state during the big hit. It can be executed at any time.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation promotion effect including the controller assembly effect has two operation units, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B, as operation targets, and the effective operation unit of the two operation units is effective. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation target is any one of three or more types of operation units other than the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. However, it may be intended only for any one of the operation units.

(Modification example 1)
Further, as described above, in the case where it is not known which of the two operation units of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is effective as the operation target, for example, in the assembly effect, the stick controller 31A and the push button are pushed. It may be possible to execute an assembly effect in which it is difficult to specify which of the buttons 31B is assembled and the operation is effective. Here, a modification 1 of the feature unit 063SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-25. 8-25 are diagrams (A) to (F) showing the assembly effect in the first modification of the feature unit 063SG.

In the assembly effect in the operation promotion effect as a modification 1 of the feature unit 063SG, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (A), after displaying the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3, FIG. 8-25 (B) ) As shown in (C), which of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B corresponds to the component is displayed in a mode in which the component image Z30, which is difficult to identify, is assembled, and is shown in FIG. 8-25 (D). As the assembly progresses, the component corresponding to the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is changed in a identifiable manner, and as shown in FIGS. 8-25 (E) and 8-25 (F), the component is changed. If the operation target is the stick controller 31A, the controller image Z1 is finally assembled, and if the operation target is the push button 31B, the push button image Z3 is finally assembled (illustrated). Omitted) is possible.

In the present modification 1, as a display mode of the component image Z30 for making it difficult to identify the operation target, it is displayed in the form of a black circle having the character "?" (FIGS. 8-25 (B) (C), etc.). ), The form in which the part is displayed as a silhouette (Fig. 8-25 (D), etc.) is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the part image is mosaicked or the outer shape of the part is deformed. Alternatively, various display modes other than the above may be adopted, such as reducing the brightness of the image display device 5. Further, while the visibility is being lowered near the completion of assembly, the parts may be colored or a sticker is attached, and then the parts may be displayed in color together with the effect image.

(Modification 2)
In the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which a parts assembly effect suggesting which operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is effective in the operation promotion effect can be executed, but the present invention is limited to this. As an assembly suggestion effect that suggests the possibility that the controller assembly effect is executed, the parts assembly effect may be executable. Here, a modification 2 of the feature unit 063SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-26. 8-26 is a diagram showing the super reach effect in the second modification of the feature unit 063SG in FIGS. 8 to 26.

As shown in FIGS. 8-26 (A) to (E), for example, during a super reach effect before executing the controller assembly effect, a component displayed in a mode of collecting image images of parts assembled in the controller assembly effect. The collective production may be feasible. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), it is difficult to identify which part is the part image Z31 corresponding to each of the plurality of parts constituting the operation target to be assembled in the assembly effect. It is displayed in a mode (for example, it is displayed in a form having a character "?" In front of the silhouette of the part), and as shown in FIGS. 8-26 (B) (C), the parts are sequentially displayed with the passage of time. By displaying (fade-in display) in a mode that changes to a identifiable mode, the operation target to be assembled in the assembly effect is gradually clarified, so that the player's interest can be attracted.

The timing for changing the part image Z31 to an identifiable mode may be a predetermined timing, a timing linked to a chance-up effect in the super reach effect, or the timing for the player. It may be various timings such as the timing when a specific mode of operation (for example, long pressing for a predetermined time, operating a button a predetermined number of times, etc.) is performed in a specific period during which the promotion effect for prompting the operation is not executed. ..

Further, in the assembly suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (D), all the part images Z31 may be finally identifiable, or as shown in FIG. 8-26 (E). Finally, only a part of the component image Z31 may be identifiablely displayed. When all the part images Z31 are finally identifiable, the effect patterns A and B that complete the assembly are easily executed in the controller assembly effect, and finally only some part images Z31 are identifiable and displayed. If this is the case, it is sufficient to facilitate the execution of the effect patterns C and D in which the assembly is not completed in the controller assembly effect.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes a promotion effect that encourages the operation of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in other effects (for example, a look-ahead effect related to the hold memory display, a notice effect, etc.) during the execution period of the assembly suggestion effect. You may try to limit. By doing so, it is possible to avoid giving a sense of discomfort to the player due to the promotion effect of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B that have not been assembled during the execution period of the assembly suggestion effect.

In addition, it is possible to execute the assembly suggestion effect without knowing which of the plurality of operation units will be effective as the operation target, and at least two of the plurality of operation units are unique parts unique to each. When the common parts are common to each of the above, it is preferable to display the common parts before the unique parts in the assembly suggestion effect. By doing so, it is not possible to predict which operation unit will be effective only by displaying the common parts, so that the player's interest can be maintained.

Further, such an assembly suggestion effect may be executed separately from the parts set effect described in the above embodiment, may be executed as an assembly suggestion effect that also serves as a parts set effect, or may be executed as an assembly suggestion effect. It may also serve as an assembly suggestion effect.

(Modification 3)
In the above-described embodiment, in the handle assembly effect, a mode in which the component images ZB1 to ZB4 constituting the ball striking operation handle 30 are assembled is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the firing is not limited to this. Before the right-handed hit notification in the operation promotion effect A is performed, the component images ZB1 to ZB4 constituting the hitting ball operation handle 30 may be displayed in a mode in which they are not assembled. Here, a modification 3 of the feature unit 063SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-27. 8-27 are views (A) to (F) showing the handle assembly effect in the third modification of the feature unit 063SG.

In the handle assembly effect, the component images ZB1 to ZB4 constituting the ball striking operation handle 30 are displayed in the mode of assembling the door frame image Z16. For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 (A) to (D). The component images ZB1 to ZB4 are sequentially displayed in an enlarged manner, and as shown in FIG. 8-27 (E), the component images ZB1 to ZB4 are displayed in an aggregated manner, and then the figure is shown. Right-handed notification may be performed as shown in 8-27 (F).

The mode for sequentially displaying each component image ZB1 to ZB4 can be changed in various ways. For example, one or a plurality of each component image ZB1 to ZB4 crosses the display area of the image display device 5. Displayed in a mode that appears from the periphery of the display area and gathers in the center, or displayed in a mode that gradually changes from a difficult-to-identify mode to a identifiable mode (fade-in display). Is also possible.

(Modification example 4)
In the above-described embodiment, in the route assembly effect, a mode in which the component images ZD1 to ZD4 constituting the second path K2 are displayed in a mode of assembling to the game board image Z20 has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, the component images ZD1 to ZD4 constituting the second path K2 may be displayed in a mode in which they are not assembled before the right-handed notification in the launch operation promotion effect B is performed. Here, a modification 4 of the feature unit 063SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-28. 8-28 are diagrams (A) to (F) showing the route assembly effect in the modified example 4 of the feature unit 063SG.

In the route assembly effect, the component images ZD1 to ZD4 constituting the second path K2 are displayed in a mode of assembling to the game board image Z20. For example, they are shown in FIGS. 8-28 (A) to (E). As described above, after each component image ZD1 to ZD4 are sequentially displayed in an enlarged display mode, right-handed notification may be performed as shown in FIG. Further, when displaying in the enlarged mode, the effect image Z35 for highlighting the component image may be displayed around the component images ZD1 to ZD4.

It should be noted that the order in which each part image ZD1 to ZD4 is enlarged and displayed may be the order in which the game ball passes when the game ball is hit to the right. By doing so, FIGS. 8-24 (G) to (J) are shown. It is possible to make the player recognize the flow of the game ball flowing down the second path K2 without performing the flow-down effect described above.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the launch operation promotion effect A in which the steering wheel assembly effect is executed at the start of the big hit is executed, and the path assembly effect is executed at the end of the big hit (at the start of the time saving state). Although the embodiment in which the effect B is executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the launch operation promotion effect B is executed at the start of the jackpot and fired at the end of the jackpot (at the start of the time saving state). The operation promotion effect A may be executed. Further, either the launch operation promotion effect A or the launch operation promotion effect B may be executed at both the start and end of the jackpot.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, after the route assembly effect is executed in FIGS. 8-23 (A) to (E) of the launch operation promotion effect B, the flow-down effect is executed in FIGS. 8-24 (G) to (K). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the flow-down effect may be omitted at least as long as the route assembly effect is executed. Further, when the launch operation promotion effect B is executed at the start of the big hit, in the flow effect, as shown in FIG. 8-24 (J), the game ball is finally replaced with the image of winning the variable winning ball device 6B. Finally, the image of the game ball winning the special variable winning ball device 7 may be displayed. Further, the flow-down effect may be executed after the handle assembly effect is executed in FIGS. 8-22 (A) to (E) of the firing operation promotion effect A.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the route assembly effect shown in FIGS. 8-23 (A) to (E) of the launch operation promotion effect B, the component images ZD1 to ZD4 are displayed in a manner of assembling to the game board image Z20. After that, an example is shown in which the game board image Z20 (completed image) in which all the part images ZD1 to ZD4 are finally assembled is not displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is final. A game board image Z20 (completed image) in which all the component images ZD1 to ZD4 are assembled may be displayed. That is, in the steering wheel assembly effect, the completed image ZB5 in which all the component images ZB1 to ZB4 are finally assembled may not be displayed, but the unfinished image may be displayed. As described above, in each assembly effect, the completed image of the predetermined member does not necessarily have to be displayed as long as the third part image using at least two part images is displayed.

(Modification 5)
In the above-described embodiment, in the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect, the handle assembly effect and the path assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect, a component image constituting the operation unit as a detection means for detecting the movement of the player is assembled. Although the mode of displaying in the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable body 32 (predetermined member) provided so as to be operable from the origin position to the effect position. When executing the movable body effect to be operated toward the movable body 32 (predetermined member), it may be possible to execute the movable body assembly effect that displays the image of the parts constituting the movable body 32 (predetermined member) in a specific mode (for example, an assembly mode). ..

Here, a modification 5 of the feature unit 063SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-29 to 8-31. 8-29 are views showing the operation mode of the movable body, and FIG. 8B is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the movable body. 8-30 are explanatory views showing the operation promotion effect as the modification 5 in FIGS. 8 to 30C. 8-31 are explanatory views (D) to (G) showing an operation promotion effect as a modification 5.

As shown in FIG. 8-29 (A), the movable body 32 is located between the origin position above the display area of the image display device 5 and the effect position located substantially in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. It is provided so that it can be moved in the vertical direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-29 (B), the movable body 32 is an LED assembled on the front side of the base member 501 and the base member 501, and a plurality of LEDs (light emitting diodes) are arranged on the front surface. It is mainly composed of a substrate 502, a base frame body 503, and lens members 504A to 504C capable of transmitting light from LEDs. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the base member 501 will be referred to as a component E1, the LED substrate 502 will be referred to as a component E2, the base frame 503 will be referred to as a component E3, and the lens members 504A to 504C will be referred to as a component E4.

In the fifth modification, the effect control CPU 120 uses the stick controller 31A or the push button as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 (B) at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the above-mentioned battle effect. The detection signal of the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B is input within the operation valid period of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B for which the operation is enabled by executing the operation promotion effect for promoting the operation of any of the 31B. This is variable when the player detects the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, or when the operation valid period elapses without inputting the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B. When the display result is a big hit, the result of the battle effect is notified, and the movable body effect of dropping the movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position is executed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 also starts the movable body assembly effect when executing the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (A), the component image ZA1 corresponding to the controller assembly effect is displayed on the left side of the display area of the image display device 5, and is movable to the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. The part image ZE1 (part image ZE2 to ZE4) corresponding to the body assembly effect is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (B), the controller assembly effect and the movable body assembly effect are advanced together, and the movable body 32 is moved up and down in the vicinity of the origin position. The built-in LED may be made to emit light according to the vertical movement.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (C), the effect control CPU 120 completes the assembly of the stick controller 31A in the controller assembly effect before completing the assembly of the movable body 32 in the movable body assembly effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (D), the controller image Z1 is displayed to notify the operation promotion of the stick controller 31A, while the assembly of the movable body 32 is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (E), it is variable at the timing when the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 35A is input during the operation valid period or when the operation valid period elapses without input of the detection signal. When the display result is a big hit, the movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the effect position, and the effect image Z40 is displayed around the movable body 32 in the display area of the image display device 5, and the ally character is the enemy character. If the variable display result is a loss, the movable body 32 is not dropped from the origin position to the production position, and the ally character is defeated by the enemy character. Notifies that the variable display result is lost.

It should be noted that the assembly of the movable body 32 may not be completed in the movable body assembly effect regardless of whether or not the variable display result is a big hit. Further, the controller assembly effect and the movable body assembly effect may be completed or failed to be assembled at the same timing, or the controller assembly effect may be completed or failed to be assembled before the movable body assembly effect.

Further, in the modification 5, the effect control CPU 120 illustrates a mode in which the controller assembly effect and the movable body assembly effect are executed at the same timing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body assembly is not limited to this. The effect may be executed independently of the controller assembly effect (operation promotion effect). Further, in the modified example 5, the form in which the movable body 32 that can be operated is applied as an example of the predetermined part material is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined member is an inoperable decorative member or the like. It may be another member, or may be a game-related gaming member or structure such as a winning opening forming member or a passage forming member such as a special variable winning ball device 7 or a variable winning ball device 6B.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the launch operation promotion effect A is executed at the start of the jackpot gaming state, and the launch operation promotion effect B is executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state (at the start of the time saving state). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the launch operation promotion effect B is executed at the start of the jackpot game state, and the launch operation promotion effect A is executed at the end of the jackpot game state (at the start of the time saving state). You may. Further, either the launch operation promotion effect A or the launch operation promotion effect B may be executed at the start and end of the jackpot game state.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modification, in the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect, the handle assembly effect and the path assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect, and the movable body assembly effect, the component images constituting the predetermined members are assembled. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the image of the parts constituting the predetermined member is displayed in a specific mode, the first part is displayed as the second part as described above. In addition to displaying in the form of assembling to the component, the wiring may be displayed in the form of connecting to a connector so that it can be identifiable that a signal is flowing through the wiring after being connected.

That is, the mode of assembling the parts includes not only the assembling of the parts but also the connection of the parts (wiring), the coloring, processing, or molding of the parts. Further, a mode in which each component image is sequentially enlarged (or reduced) as in the modified examples 3 and 4, a mode in which each component image is sequentially emphasized, and a mode in which each component image is arranged in a predetermined member. It is possible to display in various modes other than the above-mentioned assembly mode, such as those displayed in. That is, the component includes all components constituting the predetermined member, such as members constituting the predetermined member, electronic components such as solenoids, motors, sensors, and LEDs, wiring, and screws.

Further, the component image is not limited to an image imitating a component constituting a predetermined member (such as an image displayed in a manner in which a player can identify the component), but is related to a component constituting the predetermined member. If it is an image to be used, for example, it is possible to specify a part with the minimum elements such as an outline, but by omitting a part of the part, whitening, blurring, deforming, deforming, etc., the game It also includes an image or the like in which a person displays a part in a mode that is difficult to identify.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect, the handle assembly effect and the path assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect, and the movable body assembly effect, electronic parts such as wiring, a connector, a sensor, and a solenoid have a bad appearance. Although the form in which the parts are not displayed has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and these electronic parts and parts having a bad appearance may be displayed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect, the handle assembly effect, the path assembly effect, and the movable body assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect, each part image corresponding to each part is viewed from a predetermined viewpoint position. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to the present invention, although the embodiment is displayed in a different form (perspective view) and each part image is moved straight toward a predetermined part image at a predetermined speed to be assembled. The component images may be displayed in different viewpoint positions (for example, front view, side view, rear view, plan view, bottom view, etc.). Further, the component image may be rotated and displayed, reduced / enlarged, and moved, or may be moved non-linearly. In addition, the moving speed can be changed in various ways.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect, the handle assembly effect, the path assembly effect, and the movable body assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect, each part image corresponding to each part is assembled one by one. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display may be performed in a mode in which a plurality of parts are assembled together.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect, the handle assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect, and the route assembly effect, a plurality of parts constituting the operation unit capable of detecting the movement of the player are assembled. Although the form to be displayed in the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined member that is not an operation unit that can detect the movement of the player, such as a path assembly effect and a movable body assembly effect { For example, in addition to the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, the ball striking operation handle 30, and the movable body 32, the speakers 8L and 8R, various decorative parts, an image display device 5, various winning opening forming members, a variable winning ball device, and a game area Y. A plurality of parts constituting the game board 2, the pachinko game machine 1 (including the glass door frame, the game machine frame 3, and the like)} may be displayed in a specific mode.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect is started at a predetermined timing before the timing when the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 are displayed, and the handle assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect The route assembly effect exemplifies a form in which the handle image Z17 is started at a predetermined timing before the display, but for example, the controller assembly effect may be started during the battle effect, and the handle assembly may be started. The production and the route assembly production may be started from the start timing of the fanfare period or the ending period. That is, the start timing is arbitrary.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the controller assembly effect, the handle assembly effect, and the route assembly effect exemplify a mode in which all component images are continuously assembled within a predetermined period, but the present invention illustrates this. For example, the display (for example, cut-in display) in which one component image is assembled to another component image may be displayed stepwise in a plurality of times. For example, in the controller assembly effect (stage effect), the display of the mode in which one component image is assembled to another component image from the start of the variable display may be displayed stepwise in a plurality of times. Furthermore, when the pre-reading notice effect based on the hold memory can be executed, one part image is combined with another part image in a plurality of variable displays prior to the variable display in which the operation promotion effect is executed in the super reach effect. It is also possible to display the mode to be attached step by step, and to display that the assembly is completed in the variable display that executes the operation promotion effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when displaying the mode of assembling the component image during the execution of the controller assembly effect, the handle assembly effect, and the route assembly effect, a background image, an effect image, or the like of the component image may be displayed. It is possible to output the effect sound effect and the like, and the jackpot expectation may be different by changing the display mode of the background image and the effect image and the mode of the effect sound effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the controller assembly effect, the handle assembly effect, and the route assembly effect, a mode in which each part image is moved and displayed (moving image display) to display an assembling mode is illustrated. Is not limited to this, and may be displayed, for example, in a manner in which a friendly character or an enemy character introduced in the super reach effect assembles each component image. In addition, in this case, the type of character (for example, whether the character to be assembled is a friendly character or an enemy character) and the mode of the character (for example, the color, facial expression, body shape, possession of the character's clothes). The jackpot expectation may differ depending on the item you are using.

Further, in the controller assembly effect in the above-described embodiment, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 are displayed one by one in order and displayed, but each component A1 to A5 can be identified by a plurality of component images ZA1. ~ ZA5 may be displayed one by one or a plurality of ZA5s are assembled one by one from the state where all of them are displayed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the stick controller 31A in the controller assembly effect and the component images related to the plurality of components including the first component and the second component constituting each of the ball striking operation handle 30 in the handle assembly effect are assembled. After displaying in the above, as a specific part image using at least a part of the first part image and the second part image, a form of displaying the completed images ZA6 and ZB5 in which the assembly is completed has been illustrated. The specific part image using at least a part of the first part image and the second part image is not necessarily limited to the completed image in which the assembly is completed by assembling all the part images. There is no unfinished image ZA7, or an image using at least a part of the game board image Z20 and the part image ZD1 in the route assembly production (for example, an image in which the part image ZD1 is assembled to the game board image Z20. FIG. 8-23. It may be an unfinished image in which a first part image and a second part image corresponding to at least two parts out of a plurality of parts (see (B)) are assembled.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 displays the completed image ZA6 of the stick controller 31A in the controller assembly effect as shown in FIG. 8-17 (F), and then shows FIG. 8-19 (A). Although the form of displaying the controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A is illustrated as shown in the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and after displaying the completed image ZA6 of the stick controller 31A, the completed image ZA6 May be displayed in a manner of assembling to the game machine frame 3, and then the controller image Z1 may be displayed. Further, the completed image ZA6 and the controller image Z1 may or may not be the same image.

(Fifth invention)
As described above, the feature unit 063SG includes the fifth invention shown below. That is, in a gaming machine capable of playing, for example, in a pachinko gaming machine or the like, which is an example of a gaming machine, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-57252, the movement of a player is detected. A push button and an operation lever are provided as a plurality of possible detection means, and a promotion effect that encourages the player to operate by displaying an effect image corresponding to the push button or the operation lever during the operation validity period of the push button or the operation lever. There was something that could be done. In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, when any of the push button and the operation lever is activated, the effect is monotonous only by displaying the effect image corresponding to the effective detection means. Therefore, there was a problem that it was not possible to improve the interest. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve the interest
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
Detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, a stick controller 31A including a controller sensor unit 35A, a push button 31B including a push sensor 35B, a ball striking operation handle 30 including a handle sensor (not shown), etc.)
The promotion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a stick controller during the operation valid period of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) capable of executing the promotion effect for prompting the player to perform an operation that can be detected by the detection means. A portion capable of executing an operation promotion effect that encourages the player to perform an operation that can be detected by the 31A or the push button 31B. See FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 (B).
Before the promotion effect is executed, the stage effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the stage effect in which the display mode of the special effect image changes stepwise starts the operation promotion effect in the super reach effect. A portion capable of executing a component set effect of stepwise displaying component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 related to the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 used for the operation promotion effect. (See Fig. 8-16) and
With
The promotion effect execution means
The promotion effect can be executed in a plurality of types of modes including the first aspect and the second aspect in which the rate of becoming the advantageous state is higher than the case where the promotion effect of the first aspect is executed. Yes (for example, in the operation promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 has a controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A and a character image Z2 "close!" On the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (A). Or, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (B), the image display device 5 displays the push button image Z3 imitating the push button 31B and the character image Z4 "press!").
When the display mode of the special effect image changes to the special display mode in the stage effect, the promotion effect can be executed in the second aspect (for example, the set success based on the effect patterns PT2-2 and PT2-3). When the parts set effect of is executed, the operation of the stick controller 31A is promoted through the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect at a higher rate than when the parts set effect of the set failure based on the effect pattern PT2-1 is executed. Part to be. See Fig. 8-10)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the display mode of the special effect image is changed to the special display mode, and the expectation that the promotion effect is executed in the second mode can be gradually increased, so that the interest of the game is improved. To do.
Specifically, when the operation of either the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is enabled, not only the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3 is displayed and the operation promotion effect is started, but also the operation promotion effect is started. By executing the parts assembly effect before the operation, it is possible to suggest to the player that the controller image Z1 which is likely to be a big hit in the operation promotion effect is displayed, so that the big hit reliability is high. It is possible to suitably increase the player's expectation that the controller image Z1 is displayed.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The stage effect executing means is an effect image (for example, component images ZA1 to ZA5 or component images ZC1 to 1) related to an effect image (for example, controller image Z1 or push button image Z3) used for the promotion effect as the special effect image. It is characterized in that it can display ZC5).
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the staged effect is an effect performed in connection with the promotion effect.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The stage effect executing means can display a plurality of special effect images in a mode in which it is difficult to specify which of the promotion effect of the first aspect and the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed (for example,. Each part image ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 have a black silhouette having a different outer shape and surface aspect from the parts A1 to A5 of the stick controller 31A or the parts C1 to C5 of the push button 31B in the first and second stages. It is displayed in a common silhouette mode in which white characters "?" Are displayed. See Fig. 8-11).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player's expectation that the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed can be suitably increased.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The stage effect executing means displays the special effect image when a plurality of special effect images are displayed stepwise in the stage effect at a higher rate than in the case where the advantageous state does not occur. A portion in which the mode is changed (for example, when the variable display result is a big hit, the type of the image displayed in the middle is switched (changed) from the component images ZC1 to ZC5 to the component images ZA1 to ZA5. Modification example of FIG. 8-33. 7)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the display mode of the special effect image changes while the number of display of the special effect image increases.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
After displaying the special effect image in a mode in which it is difficult to distinguish which of the first aspect of the promotion effect and the second aspect of the promotion effect is executed in the stage effect, the stage effect execution means said. Which of the promotion effect of the first aspect and the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed is displayed in an identifiable manner (for example, in the parts assembly effect, the part image is displayed in the first to third stages. ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in a silhouette mode, that is, in a difficult-to-identify mode in which it is difficult for the player to discriminate which part image is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. The part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in a clear manner, that is, in an identifiable manner in which the player can identify whether the part image is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. 8-11)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is not known until the middle of the stepwise effect whether the promotion effect of the first aspect or the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed, so that the expectation that the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed is expected. Can be gradually increased, which improves the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The promotion effect executing means can execute the promotion effect in the first aspect when the special effect image does not change to the special display mode in the stage effect (for example, as an operation target of the operation promotion effect). When the push button 31B is determined, the effect patterns PT1-1 and PT2-1 that fail to set are higher than the effect patterns PT1-2, 1-3 and PT2-2, 2-3 that succeed in set. Therefore, when the parts assembly effect based on the effect patterns PT1-1 and PT2-1 that fail to set is executed, there is a high possibility that the push button image Z3 is displayed in the operation promotion effect. 10 (B))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the promotion effect is not executed.

(Sixth Invention)
As described above, the feature unit 063SG includes the sixth invention shown below. That is, in a gaming machine capable of playing, for example, in a pachinko gaming machine or the like, which is an example of a gaming machine, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-57252, the movement of a player is detected. A push button and an operation lever are provided as a plurality of possible detection means, and a promotion effect that encourages the player to operate by displaying an effect image corresponding to the push button or the operation lever during the operation validity period of the push button or the operation lever. There was something that could be done. In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, when any of the push button and the operation lever is activated, the effect is monotonous only by displaying the effect image corresponding to the effective detection means. Therefore, there was a problem that it was not possible to improve the interest. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve the interest
The gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
Detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, a stick controller 31A including a controller sensor unit 35A, a push button 31B including a push sensor 35B, a ball striking operation handle 30 including a handle sensor (not shown), etc.)
The promotion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a stick controller during the operation valid period of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) capable of executing the promotion effect for prompting the player to perform an operation that can be detected by the detection means. A portion capable of executing an operation promotion effect that encourages the player to perform an operation that can be detected by the 31A or the push button 31B. See FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 (B).
Before the promotion effect is executed, the stage effect execution means capable of executing the stage effect for displaying the special effect image stepwise (for example, before the effect control CPU 120 starts the operation promotion effect in the super reach effect). A portion capable of executing a component set effect for stepwisely displaying component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 related to the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 used for the operation promotion effect. FIGS. 8-14 to 8- 16) and
With
The promotion effect executing means executes the promotion effect in a plurality of types of modes including the first aspect and the second aspect in which the rate of becoming the advantageous state is higher than the case where the promotion effect of the first aspect is executed. It is possible (for example, in the operation promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 has a controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A and a character "close!" On the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-19 (A). Image Z2 is displayed, or as shown in FIG. 8-19 (B), the push button image Z3 imitating the push button 31B and the character image Z4 "press!" Are displayed on the image display device 5).
The stage effect executing means is a stage in which it is possible to specify whether the promotion effect of the first aspect or the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed after the special effect image is displayed in stages. The effect can be executed (for example, in the component assembly effect, in the first to third stages, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are in silhouette mode, that is, the player can either use the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. It is displayed in a difficult-to-identify mode in which it is difficult to identify whether the image is a part image of, and in the fourth stage, the part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in a clear mode, that is, the player can use the stick controller 31A or the push button. It is displayed in an identifiable manner capable of identifying which part image of 31B is (see FIG. 8-11).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is not known until the middle of the stepwise effect whether the promotion effect of the first aspect or the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed, so that the expectation that the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed is expected. Can be gradually increased, which improves the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The stage effect executing means is an effect image (for example, component images ZA1 to ZA5 or component images ZC1 to 1) related to an effect image (for example, controller image Z1 or push button image Z3) used for the promotion effect as the special effect image. It is characterized in that it can display ZC5).
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the staged effect is an effect performed in connection with the promotion effect.
More specifically, the effect images related to the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 are the component images ZA1 to ZA5 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 that form a part of the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3, and each of these component images. By displaying in order, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that all the part images are collected.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The stage effect executing means can display a plurality of special effect images in a mode in which it is difficult to specify which of the promotion effect of the first aspect and the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed (for example, each). In the first and second stages, the part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 have a black silhouette having a different outer shape and surface aspect from the parts A1 to A5 of the stick controller 31A or the parts C1 to C5 of the push button 31B. It is displayed in a common silhouette mode in which white characters such as "?" Are displayed. (See Fig. 8-11).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player's expectation that the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed can be suitably increased.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The promotion effect executing means is executed in connection with a specific promotion effect (for example, an operation promotion effect) executed in response to the stage effect and a predetermined promotion effect (for example, a dialogue advance notice) executed regardless of the stage effect. Operation promotion effect, etc.) and can be executed,
In the predetermined promotion effect, the promotion effect is executed in a mode different from the specific promotion effect (for example, the controller image Z1 of the operation promotion effect executed in connection with the dialogue advance notice is executed in connection with the parts assembly effect. A part in which the display mode is different from that of the controller image Z1 for the operation promotion effect. See FIG. 8-32. Modification example 6)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress the confusion between the specific promotion effect and the predetermined promotion effect due to the difference in the mode, while preventing the deterioration of the interest due to not executing the predetermined promotion effect during the execution of the stage effect.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The stage effect executing means displays the special effect image based on any one of a plurality of display patterns having different ratios of the advantageous states (for example, effect patterns PT1-1, PT1-2, PT1-3). , PT2-1, PT2-2, PT2-3, and the execution rate is set so that the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot increases in this order. See FIG. 8-10 (A)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the types of effects can be diversified, and the player can expect whether or not the display pattern will be in an advantageous state, so that the display pattern can be focused on.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The promotion effect executing means can execute the promotion effect in the first aspect or the second aspect by using a special effect image different from the special effect image (for example, the operation promotion effect used for the operation promotion effect). A part where a stepwise effect may be executed using a special effect image (for example, a character image) that has nothing to do with the image)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to give unexpectedness by the appearance of a special effect image.

(Modification 6)
Next, a modification 6 of the feature unit 063SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-32. 8-32 are explanatory views (A) to (C) showing an operation promotion effect as a modification 6 of the feature unit 063SG.

In the above embodiment, after executing the parts assembly effect in the super reach, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 (V), either the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is used to notify whether or not the hit is a big hit. The controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 are displayed when the operation promotion effect for promoting the operation is executed, but it is separate from the operation promotion effect for notifying whether or not such a big hit. , When executing the operation promotion effect for promoting the operation of either the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, the controller has a mode different from that of the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 shown in FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 (V). It is preferable to display an image Z63, a push button image (not shown), or the like.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-32 (A), when the parts assembly effect is being executed in the super reach effect, the ally character wins the battle effect and becomes a big hit when the movement of the player is detected. When it is possible to execute a dialogue notice as a warning effect in which a dialogue suggesting a possibility is displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-32 (B), the stick controller 31A (or a push button) is given to the player during the operation validity period. It is possible to display the controller image Z63 (or push button image) that prompts the operation of 31B). When the operation of the stick controller 31A (or the push button 31B) is detected during the operation valid period, the character image Z61 and the dialogue image Z62 are displayed.

The controller image ZA1 has a display mode in which the effect image Z60 imitating a flame is not displayed around the stick controller 31A as in the controller image Z1 at the time of assembly production. As described above, the controller image ZA1 of the operation promotion effect executed in connection with the dialogue notice is different from the controller image Z1 of the operation promotion effect executed in connection with the parts set effect, so that the parts set is different. Since it is possible to execute other promotion effects during the production, and it becomes easier to understand that the advance notice effect is different from the operation promotion effect performed in connection with the parts set effect, the player can perform the parts set effect and others. It becomes easy to understand which of the productions of the above is related to the operation promotion production.

(Modification 7)
Next, a modification 7 of the feature unit 063SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-33. 8-33 are explanatory views (A) to (E) showing an operation example of the component assembly effect as the modification 7 of the feature unit 063SG.

In the above-described embodiment, with respect to the effect patterns PT1-1 to PT2-3 for the component assembly effect, either the component images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the stick controller 31A or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 corresponding to the push button 31B It was displayed in order, but when the variable display result is a big hit, the type of the image displayed in the middle may be switched (changed) from the part images ZC1 to ZC5 to the part images ZA1 to ZA5. ..

For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-33 (A) to (C), the component images ZC1 and ZC2 corresponding to the second push button 31B are displayed, but when the third and subsequent component images are displayed. , The component images ZA3 to ZA5 corresponding to the stick controller 31A may be displayed in the third and subsequent stages. That is, in this case, the effect pattern PT1-1 to PT1-3 corresponding to the push button 31B is changed to the effect pattern PT2-1 to PT2-3 corresponding to the stick controller 31A, and the promotion pattern is changed to increase the jackpot reliability. Has been done.

(Modification 8)
Next, a modification 8 of the feature unit 063SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-34. 8-34 are explanatory views (A) to (B) showing an operation example of the operation promotion effect as a modification 8 of the feature unit 063SG.

In the above-described embodiment, in the operation promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (A) or 8-19 (B), a controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A or a push button image imitating the push button 31B. When the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the player is detected while the Z3 is displayed, if the variable display result is lost, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (E) (F). The variable display result is notified that the stick controller 31A is lost. For example, when the loss is notified when the controller image Z1 of the stick controller 31A is displayed, the figure shows when the operation of the player's stick controller 31A is detected. As shown in 8-34 (B), the effect image in which the stick controller 31A is disassembled (broken) may be displayed.

By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the variable display result is lost by operating the stick controller 31A. Further, particularly when the controller image Z1 is displayed after the assembly is completed in the controller assembly effect, it is possible to notify the player that the assembly has failed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of an advantageous state advantageous for the player, a mode in which the jackpot game state is applied is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the expected value of the game medium that can be obtained is not limited to this. There are multiple types of specific game states with different numbers (big hits with different numbers of rounds, etc.), high base states (time saving states) where the conditions for paying out prize balls are more likely to be satisfied than in normal game states, and the probability of becoming the specific game state. Includes high-probability gaming state (high-probability state), high-probability low-base state (latent probability variation state), special reach state (for example, super reach, etc.), and a state in which the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern. Is done.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player, a stick controller 31A including the controller sensor unit 35A, a push button 31B including the push sensor 35B, a ball striking operation handle 30 including the handle sensor, and the like are applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the above, other operating means such as a jog dial, a cross key, a lever, and the player without contacting the operating means. It also includes a video camera, a sensor, and the like that can be detected by digitally recording a predetermined movement of the player.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the stick controller 31A including the controller sensor unit 35A as the detection means, the push button 31B including the push sensor 35B, and the ball striking operation handle 30 including the handle sensor can be detected (for example, pulling toward the front). Controller image Z1 imitating stick controller 31A, push button image imitating push button 31B in operation promotion effect and launch operation promotion effect as promotion effect to encourage the player to perform operation, push operation, rotation operation, etc. Z3, a handle image Z17 imitating the ball striking operation handle 30, a right arrow image Z18, etc. are displayed, and character images such as "close!", "Push!", And "right hit!" Are displayed. The present invention is not limited to this, and not only the one that prompts the operation by displaying the effect image as described above, but also the light emitting means (LED, etc.) provided on the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, the ball striking operation handle 30, and the like. ) Is emitted to promote operation (operation), voice messages indicating operation modes such as "close!", "Push!", And "right-handed!" Are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and an image display device. The operation (operation) may be prompted by a display device other than 5.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the operation promotion effect, a mode in which the operation of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, that is, one of the two operation units (detection means) is promoted has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and may promote the operation of both the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Further, it may be provided with three or more operation units (detection means) and promote the operation of at least one operation unit (detection means) among the three or more operation units (detection means).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are applied as the detection means that may be the operation target of the operation promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited thereto. However, the detection means that may be the operation target of the operation promotion effect is only two or more detection means having different movements (operation) modes of the player, such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Instead, two or more detection means (for example, two or more buttons) individually provided even if the operation mode of the player is the same, or a second operation different from the first operation acceptance mode and the first operation acceptance mode. A detection means that can be changed into an acceptance mode (for example, a button whose operation acceptance mode can be changed between a normal operation acceptance mode and a protruding acceptance mode that is more prominent than usual) may be the operation target.

That is, the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of types of promotion effects including the first aspect and the second aspect in which the ratio (reliability) of a big hit is higher than when the promotion effect of the first aspect is executed. In this case, it suffices if at least two of the three or more modes can be performed (for example, the promotion effect according to the normal operation acceptance mode and the promotion effect according to the protrusion acceptance mode). ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of the stage effect executed before the promotion effect is executed, the operation promotion effect for urging the player to perform an operation in which the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be detected is executed. Although the embodiment in which the component assembly effect is applied is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the handle image Z17 showing that the ball striking operation handle 30 is rotated to the right and the right By displaying the arrow image Z18, it may be possible to execute a stepwise effect corresponding to a right-handed operation promotion effect that gives a right-handed notification.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, it is displayed in the specific display area Z51 as a special effect image related to the operation promotion effect that is displayed so that the display mode changes stepwise in the parts assembly effect, and is displayed in the operation promotion effect. The embodiment in which the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 constituting the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 are applied has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect image is used for the operation promotion effect. If it is a related effect image, it does not have to be a component image that constitutes at least a part of the effect image displayed in the operation promotion effect. For example, an operation promotion effect image displayed in the operation promotion effect (for example, a controller image). It may be an effect image having the same display mode as Z1 or the push button image Z3), an effect image having a similar display mode, or an effect image having a different display mode.

That is, the special effect image displayed stepwise in the stepwise effect is an image (for example, a component) that constitutes at least a part of the operation promotion effect image (for example, the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3) used for the operation promotion effect. Not only related effect images related to the operation promotion effect image (for example, parts images ZA1 to ZA5, ZC1 to ZC5, etc.), but also separate effect images not related to the operation promotion effect, that is, used for the operation promotion effect. It may be a special effect image (for example, a character image) that has nothing to do with the operation promotion effect image.

Further, since the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 as special effect images are component images forming a part of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to be operated in the operation promotion effect, the stick controller 31A and the like. Although the push button 31B was regarded as an effect image that is easy to identify, even an image that constitutes a part of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is an image in a mode that makes it difficult to identify that it is a component image (for example, a fragment). It may be an image such as). Further, the special effect image may be a photographic image such as a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B, in addition to an image of a silhouette aspect, an icon image, or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the component assembly effect as the step effect, a mode in which a plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed stepwise (in order) in the specific display area Z51 and arranged side by side is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and corresponds to, for example, a push button image Z3 displayed in an operation promotion effect, a handle image Z17 displayed in a right-handed operation promotion effect, and a right arrow image Z18. When the stepwise effect can be executed, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the controller image Z1 are displayed side by side in the specific display area Z51 in the component assembly effect as in the above embodiment, and then the displayed component image ZA1 is displayed. Assembling the controller to assemble ZA5 Before the promotion effect is executed, the push button image Z3 and the handle image Z17 are assembled by assembling the partial images that form a part of the push button image Z3 and the handle image Z17. The right arrow image Z18 may be formed by collecting partial images that form or form a part of the right arrow image Z18.

That is, in the stepwise effect, after the special effect image is displayed stepwise, the promotion effect of the first aspect (operation promotion effect in which the controller image Z1 is displayed) and the promotion effect of the second aspect (push button image Z3 are displayed). If it becomes possible to specify which of the operation promotion effect () to be executed (the player can predict), the final effect is achieved by using a plurality of special effect images displayed stepwise as in the above embodiment. It is not necessary to display the operation promotion effect image in order, it is sufficient to display a plurality of special effect images in order, and the display mode of one special effect image is changed stepwise so that the operation promotion effect image can be specified. (For example, the display mode of the controller image Z1 may be changed stepwise as in the component images ZA1 to ZA5).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the component assembly effect as the step effect, the operation promotion effect in which the controller image Z1 is displayed and the push button image Z3 are displayed in the fourth stage of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5. Although the embodiment in which which of the operation promotion effects to be performed is changed to a mode that can be specified is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and finally the promotion effect of the first aspect (controller image). If it becomes possible to specify which of the operation promotion effect in which Z1 is displayed and the promotion effect in the second aspect (operation promotion effect in which the push button image Z3 is displayed) is executed, the special effect image (each) is necessarily specified. It is not necessary to display the component images ZA1 to ZA5, ZC1 to ZC5) in a mode in which it is possible to specify whether the promotion effect of the first aspect or the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed. That is, after changing each part image ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 up to the third stage, it is possible to specify whether the promotion effect of the first aspect or the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed. For example, a character image such as "controller GET!") Can be displayed separately from the special effect image, or a voice that can specify whether the promotion effect of the first aspect or the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed. (For example, "Controller GET!" Or the like) may be output.

Further, the stepwise change of the display mode of the special effect image in the stepwise effect means that the plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA5 related to the stick controller 31A change from the silhouette mode to the icon mode in the component set effect. Not only does the number of component images ZA1 to ZA5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 gradually increase, that is, the display mode of the specific display area Z51 changes as the special effect image is displayed stepwise. For example, the display mode such as the color, outer shape, contrast, and brightness of the special effect image may change with the passage of time, and the characters, symbols, numbers, etc. may be updated or additionally displayed, the level, and the like. Includes those that are displayed in an increase or decrease, those in which the special effect image changes from a state in which it is difficult to see to a state in which it is easy to see.

Further, displaying the special effect image stepwise in the stepwise effect means that the display mode of one or more part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 changes from the first stage to the fourth stage in the component set effect. By not only displaying but also displaying each component image ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 in order by a predetermined number, the number of component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 increases or decreases. This includes displaying the component images ZA1 to ZA5 so as to form a predetermined operation promotion effect image, as in the controller assembly effect.

Further, the special effect image may be, for example, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 as they are, or may be an image including the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and a background area around the component images ZA1 to ZA5. Further, the stepwise change may be a part or the whole of the display mode of the special effect image.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA5 or all component images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in the specific display area Z51 as an example of a special display mode of the special effect image in the component assembly effect (stage effect). Although the embodiment to which the display mode of collective success is applied has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special display mode can be arbitrarily changed as long as it is a predetermined display mode. Even if all of the plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are not aggregated in the display area Z51, a predetermined special effect image (for example, component image ZA5 or component image ZC5) may be displayed among the plurality of component images. ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the component assembly effect, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed step by step in the specific display area Z51. The image is not limited, and two or more images of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 may be displayed together, and all the component images ZA1 to ZA5 may be displayed together as in the assembly suggestion effect of the modification 2. , ZC1 to ZC5 may be displayed in the first stage display mode, and then the display mode of some or all part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 may be changed stepwise.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the component assembly effect, an embodiment in which either the component images ZA1 to ZA5 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed stepwise in the specific display area Z51 has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. The component images ZA1 to ZA5 and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 may be displayed in a mixed state. In this case, for example, the component image having a large number of images finally displayed may be displayed. The execution of the operation promotion effect by the corresponding operation unit may be suggested.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the component assembly effect, a mode in which the display mode of each component image changes in four stages (see FIG. 8-11) is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be changed in at least two steps, and may be changed in five or more steps.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the component assembly effect, the display mode of each component image changes from the first stage to the fourth stage, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of components are displayed. The image of any one or more of the parts may have an effect pattern in which the display is started from the second or higher stage.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the component assembly effect, the display mode of each component image changes from the first stage to the fourth stage at a predetermined timing during the reach effect. Is not limited to this, and the display mode may be changed at the timing when the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the player is detected.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the component assembly effect, each component image is displayed, and in the first to third stages, any of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 related to the controller image Z1 and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 related to the push button image Z3. Is displayed in a mode that is difficult to identify (identify), and in the fourth stage, which of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 is displayed in an identifiable (identifiable) manner. Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least in the first stage, the promotion effect of the first aspect (operation promotion effect in which the controller image Z1 is displayed) and the promotion effect of the second aspect (push) are illustrated. If it is displayed in a mode in which it is difficult to identify (identify) which of the button image Z3 is displayed (operation promotion effect), it can be identified in the second and third stages. It may be displayed in a (identifiable) manner. Further, the number of stages of displaying in a difficult-to-identify mode and each of the stages displaying in an identifiable mode may be at least 1 or more, and can be changed in various ways.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the first stage and the second stage of the parts assembly effect, a form using a silhouette aspect commonly used in the part images ZA1 to ZA5 and the part images ZC1 to ZC5 has been illustrated. The invention is not limited to this, and the component images ZA1 to ZA5 in the first and second stages and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 in the first and second stages are displayed as images having different display modes. You may try to do it. For example, in the first stage or the second stage, any one of a plurality of silhouette images having different display modes may be displayed.

Further, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 as special effect images are the promotion effect of the first aspect (operation promotion effect in which the controller image Z1 is displayed) and the promotion effect of the second aspect (push button image Z3 is displayed). The mode in which it is difficult to identify which of the operation promotion effect to be performed) is, for example, a state in which the outer shape of the part image is deformed or the surface mode is not shown as in the silhouette mode. The player is special, such as omitting a part, whitening, blurring, deforming, etc., and making it difficult for the player to see the special production image (for example, making it difficult to see by increasing or decreasing the brightness). Includes an image or the like in which the effect image is displayed in a mode that is difficult to specify.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when it is determined to display the controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A in the operation promotion effect, before displaying the controller image Z1 with the start of the operation valid period of the stick controller 31A. Although the embodiment in which the controller assembly effect can be executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when it is determined to display the controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A in the operation promotion effect. , It is not necessary to execute the controller assembly effect. Further, even when all the component images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the controller image Z1 are displayed in the component assembly effect (when the assembly is successful), the operation valid period of the stick controller 31A starts without executing the controller assembly effect. The controller image Z1 may be displayed accordingly.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the controller image Z1 may be displayed in the operation promotion effect even when the effect based on the set failure effect patterns PT1-1 and PT2-1 is executed in the component assembly effect. Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the effect based on the set failure effect patterns PT1-1 and PT2-1 is executed, the controller image Z1 is displayed in the operation promotion effect. It may not be done.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, even when an effect based on the effect pattern PT1-2, 1-3, PT2-2, 2-3 of the assembly success is executed in the parts assembly effect, the push button is displayed in the operation promotion effect. Although the form in which the image Z3 may be displayed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the production based on the production pattern PT1-2, 1-3, PT2-2, 2-3 of the collective success is illustrated. When is executed, the push button image Z3 may not be displayed in the operation promotion effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the controller assembly effect can be executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the push button assembly effect for assembling the push button 31B may be executed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the effect pattern type is determined in the parts assembly effect pattern determination process, the execution ratio is different depending on whether the operation target in the operation promotion effect is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the production patterns may be determined at a different ratio depending on whether the variable display result is a big hit or a loss. However, in the operation promotion effect, one of the effect patterns may be determined at a different ratio depending on whether the controller assembly effect is executed or not.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the component set effect as the step effect is executed during the battle effect period in the super reach is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion notification is started. The execution period of the parts assembly effect is arbitrary, for example, other than the execution period of the battle effect of super reach (for example, the period after the start of variable display and before the development of super reach). May be good. Specifically, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, a pseudo-continuous production that makes one variable display look like multiple variable displays in a pseudo manner. When the operation promotion effect is executed according to the above, the stepwise effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Alternatively, as the look-ahead notice effect, the execution period of the variable display before the variable display in which the component set effect is executed may be set. Further, the component set effect may be executed a plurality of times during the execution period of one variable display.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the component assembly effect as the stepwise effect, the time for displaying the component image stepwise (effect period) is the same, but the effect patterns PT1-1 to PT2-1 and PT2-1 are the same. The production period may be different depending on ~ 3.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation promotion effect and the stage effect (part assembly effect) corresponding to the operation promotion effect are exemplified only when the variable display based on the super reach variation pattern is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and changes when the operation promotion effect and the step effect (parts set effect) corresponding to the operation promotion effect can be executed in a plurality of variation patterns having different variable display times. The production time may be different according to the variable display time of the pattern.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the component assembly effect, each component image ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 appear in order in the specific display area Z51 and are displayed, but the present invention is limited thereto. For example, as a look-ahead notice effect, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual one, and the display mode of the hold display or active display can be changed. , The parts images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5, which are special effect images, are changed to a identifiable display mode at the timing before the parts assembly effect is started, and the hold is performed at the timing when the parts assembly effect is started. It may be possible to execute an effect in which the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 displayed as the display or the active display are moved to the specific display area Z51 and displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suggest to the player the possibility that the parts set effect is executed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game ball having a predetermined number of balls is a game machine. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored and stored. In these enclosed game machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

In the case of a slot machine, the gaming area of the present invention corresponds to, for example, a variable display area in which a variable display of a symbol is executed by a variable display device such as a reel. Further, the display device of the present invention corresponds to a variable display device (for example, a reel, a liquid crystal display, etc.) having the above-mentioned symbol.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above and below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, a stick controller 31A including a controller sensor unit 35A, a push button 31B including a push sensor 35B, a ball striking operation handle 30 including a handle sensor (not shown), etc.)
The promotion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a stick controller during the operation valid period of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) capable of executing the promotion effect for prompting the player to perform an operation that can be detected by the detection means. A portion capable of executing an operation promotion effect that encourages the player to perform an operation that can be detected by the 31A or the push button 31B. See FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 (B).
Before the promotion effect is executed, the stage effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the stage effect in which the display mode of the special effect image changes stepwise starts the operation promotion effect in the super reach effect. A portion capable of executing a component set effect of stepwise displaying component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 related to the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 used for the operation promotion effect. (See Fig. 8-16), and
The stage effect executing means is an effect image (for example, component images ZA1 to ZA5 or component images ZC1 to 1) related to an effect image (for example, controller image Z1 or push button image Z3) used for the promotion effect as the special effect image. ZC5) can be displayed,
The promotion effect execution means
The promotion effect can be executed in a plurality of types of modes including the first aspect and the second aspect in which the rate of becoming the advantageous state is higher than the case where the promotion effect of the first aspect is executed. Yes (for example, in the operation promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 has a controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A and a character image Z2 "close!" On the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (A). Or, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (B), the image display device 5 displays the push button image Z3 imitating the push button 31B and the character image Z4 "press!").
When the display mode of the special effect image changes to the special display mode in the stage effect, the promotion effect can be executed in the second aspect (for example, the set success based on the effect patterns PT2-2 and PT2-3). When the parts set effect of is executed, the operation of the stick controller 31A is promoted through the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect at a higher rate than when the parts set effect of the set failure based on the effect pattern PT2-1 is executed. Part to be. See Fig. 8-10)
further,
A change effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, and step 57AKS010) that changes the display mode of the specific display.
It is provided with a specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a zone effect of a display change high probability zone).
When the specific effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not executed.
Even after the specific effect is completed, the specific display whose display mode has changed when the specific effect has been executed is displayed more than the specific display whose display mode has not changed when the specific effect has been executed. The mode is easily changed (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display).
A game machine can be mentioned.
According to this feature, the display mode of the special effect image is changed to the special display mode, and the expectation that the promotion effect is executed in the second mode can be gradually increased, so that the interest of the game is improved. To do. Further, according to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, the promotion effect and the change effect may be associated with each other. For example, when the first aspect is displayed as the promotion effect, the execution rate of the change effect may be higher than when the second aspect is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to infer the execution of the change effect from the effect mode of the promotion effect, and the interest is improved.

Further, the stepwise effect and the change effect may be associated with each other. For example, the display mode of the specific display may be changed at the timing when the stage effect changes. By doing so, each production will change at the same timing, and the interest of the game will improve.

Moreover, you may associate a stage effect and a specific effect. For example, when the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the special effect image may be more likely to change to the special display mode in the step stage effect. By doing so, when the stepwise effect is executed while the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the special effect image is changed to the special display mode and the promotion effect is executed in the second aspect. Expectations for things can be further raised, and the interest of the game is further improved.
Further, by doing so, when the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the special effect image is changed to the special display mode and the promotion effect is executed in the second mode, and the specific effect is executed. It is possible to raise the expectation that the display mode of the specific display will change while the specific display is being displayed and that the display mode will change further after the end of the specific effect, further improving the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as an example of the form of a gaming machine that can be expected to improve the interest of the game and further change the display mode of the specific display, a game capable of displaying a specific display (for example, hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display. A machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1)
A change effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, and step 57AKS010) that changes the display mode of the specific display.
It is provided with a specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a zone effect of a display change high probability zone).
When the specific effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not executed.
Even after the specific effect is completed, the specific display whose display mode has changed when the specific effect has been executed is displayed more than the specific display whose display mode has not changed when the specific effect has been executed. Examples thereof include game machines whose modes are easily changed (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display). Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this game machine will be described as another form example.
(Examples of other embodiments)

(Explanation of feature 112IW)
Next, the feature portion 112IW will be described. The setting of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 112IW can be changed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 whose settings can be changed, it is possible to set any of a plurality of set values, and it is possible to control the advantageous state (big hit game state) at different ratios according to the set set values. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the other feature unit may also be configured so that the setting can be changed in the same manner as the feature unit 112IW. First, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 112IW001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a (gauge board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 112IW003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 112IW003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 112IW003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 112IW003 centering on the left side and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 112IW003a, and when the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the game machine frame 112IW003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the clerk of the game hall into the lock and unlocking it, and the player other than the clerk can open the game machine frame 112IW003 and the glass door frame. The 112IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 112IW201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, on the main board 11, a setting key 112IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state described later, and a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the setting change state are changed. A setting changeover switch 112IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is housed in the board case 112IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back surface of the board case 112IW201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 112IW201.

Since the board case 112IW201 having the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not possible when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. It is possible, and the operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003 using a predetermined door key. Further, since the setting key 112IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the setting key 112IW051. The setting key 112IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. In the feature portion 112IW, the form in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but one key may be used in combination.

Further, the substrate case 112IW201 is provided with a display monitor 112IW029 and a display changeover switch 112IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 112IW029. The display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 112IW201. That is, the display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are arranged in front of the board case 112IW201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognized, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the feature unit 112IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. There is a risk that the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operated from the inside of the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in this feature unit 112IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3, a substrate including a setting key 112IW051 and a setting changeover switch 112IW052 at the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. A security cover 112IW500A that covers the right side of the case 112IW201 from the back side is attached. The security cover 112IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 112IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 112IW500Ab extending from the rear end portion of the short piece 112IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is composed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 112IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 112IW201. Further, the security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the right end portion of the outer frame 112IW001a via the front end portion of the short piece 112IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 9-2, the long piece 112IW500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right portion of the substrate case 112IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. As a result, the right side portion of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are inoperable by the long piece 112IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-3, when the game machine frame 112IW003 is open, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 move together with the game machine frame 112IW003 from the long piece 112IW500Ab. By separating them, the covering state of the long piece 112IW500Ab is released, and the operation becomes operable.

That is, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW, when the game machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500A regulates the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. While the state is maintained, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the above-mentioned restricted state by the security cover 112IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is permitted. It becomes a state.

Since the board case 112IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. The set value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 unless the clerk of the game hall opens the gaming machine frame 112IW003 with the door key.

However, even if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) of the game field, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A setting key 112IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by allowing an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate to enter between the gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the machines and the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since there is a possibility that the setting value may be changed by operating the setting changeover switch 112IW052, the setting switch with the setting key 112IW051 by the security cover 112IW500A while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. By maintaining the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 112IW052 is regulated, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a regulated state in which the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed and the right side of the back surface of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered by the security cover 112IW500A, the substrate is passed through the transparent security cover 112IW500A. Since the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 112IW201 can be seen through, the status of the mounting surface on the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted, the seal, and the like can be easily confirmed.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as the work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

In the feature unit 112IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR4 and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables such as the determination table shown in FIG. 9-4, which is prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), and FIG. In addition to the display result judgment table (set value 3) shown in -4 (C), the jackpot type judgment table (not shown), the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), and the general drawing. A display result determination table (not shown), a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW has a configuration in which the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 having the lowest payout rate and increasing the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3 to increase the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3 the advantage increases stepwise.

(Display result judgment table)
9-4 (A) to 9-4 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. In the case of, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change) than when the set values are "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 for non-probability change, 1/32 for probability change). To do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/300 at the time of non-probability change, 1/30 at the time of probability change) than in a certain case. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/300 for non-probability change, 1/30 for probability change). To do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability than the case of "2" (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change). Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change). To do.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 (C). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

The feature unit 112IW provides a total of three set values of 1 to 3 as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 2 or 4 or more.

Further, the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a mode in which the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player (the jackpot probability increases), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

(Display monitor 112IW029)
In this feature unit 112IW, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of game balls entering each winning opening (large winning opening, second major winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening) It is possible to perform aggregation and calculate various winning information such as the continuous ratio, the winning ratio, and the base based on the aggregation.

Specifically, the display monitor 112IW029 includes a 4-digit display unit. The display unit of each digit is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments drawing the shape of "8" and dots arranged at the lower right side of the 7 segments.

The display contents are displayed on the first-digit display unit and the second-digit display unit, and the numerical values are displayed as percentages on the third-digit display unit and the fourth-digit display unit. The display No. 1 displays the short-term continuous ratio, and the display No. 2 displays the short-term combination ratio. Display No. 3 displays the total cumulative ratio, and display No. 4 displays the total cumulative combination ratio. Further, in display No. 5, a base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No. 6, a base (base 2) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls is displayed. Will be done.

The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for obtaining the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the continuous ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big winning opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening in the big hit game state to the total number of prize balls. May be good. Further, the base may be calculated individually for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the first-digit display unit and the second-digit display unit, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, "Y7." Is displayed on the display unit of the first digit and the display unit of the second digit. When the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display unit and the fourth digit display unit, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. When is displayed, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit.

When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the first digit display unit and the second digit display unit, and the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. Is displayed with "A7." On the display unit of the first digit and the display unit of the second digit. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit, and the total of the display No. 4 is displayed. When the cumulative winning combination ratio is displayed, the total cumulative winning combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display unit and the fourth digit display unit.

When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." Is displayed on the display unit of the first digit and the display unit of the second digit, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the one digit is displayed. "B6." Is displayed on the eye display and the second digit display. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. When it is displayed, the total cumulative winning combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit.

Furthermore, the display of these short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 is based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, and the setting values set at that time are It is possible to sequentially change the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2.

In the feature unit 112IW, the display monitor 112IW029 exemplifies a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this and displays. The monitor 112IW029 may be able to display only a numerical value of 1 or only a numerical value of any 2 of these ratios, combination ratios, and bases.

In addition, the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of prize balls given, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 112IW029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 112IW029 may display the history of the number of prize balls given without calculating the joint ratio, the winning ratio, and the base. Good.

(Setting change processing)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW will be described. 9-5 to 9-7 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the feature unit 112IW. In the feature unit 112IW, the processing of steps 112IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for the effect control means to start for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) starts when the power supply to the game machine is started. Set the timer (step 112IWS003). In this case, the effect control means activation waiting timer is set with a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the game machine to the activation of the effect control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 112IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 112IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 112IWS004 and the processes of steps 112IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 112IWS006.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS003 to S005, the processes after step 112IWS006 are executed after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 is started, and the setting values are changed and confirmed, and the RAM initialization and recovery processes are executed. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization specification command, and a recovery command, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is started, and the command is missed. It can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value is a value at the time of shipment from the factory (for example, a value other than "0" or a possible set value) (step 112IWS006). If the factory default settings are used (step 112IWS006; Yes), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

If it is not the factory default setting (step 112IWS006; No), that is, if the set value has already been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as in step S4. It is determined whether or not the data is stored (step 112IWS007). Specifically, in step 112IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) by the same process as in step S5, and the data is normal. Whether or not it is determined (step 112 IWS008). In step 112 IWS008, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 112IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 112IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting changing flag indicating that the setting value is being changed is set (step 112IWS009). ). If the setting changing flag is set (step 112IWS009; Yes), that is, if a power failure occurs during the setting value change and the power supply to the game machine is restarted, the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

In step 112IWS010, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 112IWS010). The CPU 103 may control the display monitor 112IW029 to display a display (for example, display of "E") indicating that a RAM error has occurred.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (a state in which the door (game machine frame 112IW003) is open) (step 112IWS011). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS012). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 120AKSA01). When the RAM clear flag is on, the RAM clear process for clearing the stored contents of the RAM 102 is executed after the process related to the setting change is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step 120 AKSA03.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is off (when the door is closed) (N in step 112IWS011) or when the setting key 112IW051 is off (N in step 112IWS012), from the clear switch. When the output signal of is off (N in step 112IWS013), the process proceeds to the loop process without shifting to the step 120AKSA01. Before entering the loop process, the control of transmitting the RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (the process of step 112IWS010) may be executed.

When the processes of steps 112IWS006 to S013 are executed, the backup RAM is not normal in the feature unit 112IW (N in steps 112IWS007 and S008), or the factory default settings remain (step 112IWS007, S008). In the case of 112IWS006 Y), if a power failure occurs during the setting change (Y in step 112IWS009), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 open. On condition that, the set value after step 120 AKSA03 can be changed, and then the RAM is cleared. On the other hand, unless the game machine frame 112IW003 is opened and the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, the set value cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 112IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015).

If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 120AKSA02).

After the processing of step 120AKSA02 or if the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS016). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS017).

If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA03). Here, when the setting key 112IW051 is on, the process for confirming the setting (setting confirmation process) or the process for changing the setting (setting change) depends on the state of the RAM clear flag (that is, on / off of the clear switch). Process) is executed. The error processing may be executed when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is turned off while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed.

When the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA03; Yes), a setting change start command indicating that the setting change process is started is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA04). When the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA03; No), a setting confirmation start command indicating that the setting confirmation process is started is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA05).

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting change command or the setting confirmation command, it controls to notify that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed (for example, the image display device 5 displays a predetermined image or displays the predetermined image. A predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value is a factory default value (for example, “0” or the like) (step 120AKSA06). If it is the factory default setting value (step 120AKSA06; Yes), the set value is set to "1" (step 120AKSA07). In step 120 AKSA07, the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is updated to "1".

In step 120 AKSA07, when the set value is the factory default value, the set value is set to "1" as the initial value, but other set values may be set as the initial value. Also, when there is a RAM error error such as when the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 or when the backup data is not normal (for example, when the process of step 112IWS010 is executed), the set value is set to the initial value "1". You may try to do it. In this case, when the process of step 112IWS010 is executed (when step 112IWS006; Yes, step 112IWS007; No, or step 112IWS008; No), the RAM error flag is set, and in step 120AKSA06, the RAM error flag is set. May be determined whether or not is on.

If it is not the factory default setting (step 120AKSA06; No), or after executing the process of step 120AKSA07, the CPU 103 displays the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 120AKSA08). ).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA09). When the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA09; Yes), the setting changing flag is set (step 120AKSA10).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is on (step 120AKSA11). If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is on (step 120AKSA11; Yes), the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is updated (step 120AKSA12). The set value is updated every time the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is operated (pressed). For example, if the set value is "1", it is updated to "2", if the set value is "2", it is updated to "3", and if the set value is "3", it is updated to "1". Just update. A specific setting value may be specified by operating the setting changeover switch 112IW052.

If the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA09; No), it means that the setting has been confirmed, so the process related to the setting change is not executed. In this case, or when the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is not on (step 120AKSA11; No), it is determined whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is turned off after the processing of step 120AKSA12 is executed. (Step 120 AKSA13).

If the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 remains ON (step 120AKSA13; No), the process returns to step 120AKSA08 to continue the setting confirmation process or the setting change process. When the set value is updated in step 120AKSA12, the process of step 120AKSA08 is executed again, so that the updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

When the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is off (step 120AKSA13; Yes), it is determined whether or not the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA14). When the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA14; Yes), the setting changing flag is reset (step 120AKSA15), and a setting change end command indicating that the setting change is completed is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA16). ).

When the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA14; No), a setting confirmation end command indicating that the setting confirmation is completed is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA17).

After that, the display of the set value on the display monitor 112IW029 is erased (step 120AKSA18), and the set value command indicating the set value is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS031). The setting value command may be sent only when the setting value is updated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA19). When the RAM clear flag is on (step 120 AKSA19; Yes), the RAM clear process is executed (step 120 AKSA 20). In the RAM clear process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear processing, the area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the connection ratio and the combination Performance display information such as ratio and base, and set value information are not cleared and are retained.

After that, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 by the same process as in step S9 (step 112IWS033).

When the RAM clear flag is off (step 120 AKSA19; No), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 112 IWS022) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped by the same process as in step S6. Do. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 by the same process as in step S7 (step 112IWS023).

After the process of step 112IWS033 or step 112IWS023, the process proceeds to the process of step 112IWS034. The processing of steps 112IWS034 to S036 is the same as the processing of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

In step 120AKSA08, the set value may be displayed on the image display device 5. Then, the subsequent processing may be executed by using the image display device 5.

Further, during the execution of the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are set to a mode in which they are not displayed during the normal game (for example, a mode in which all segments of the 7-segment LED are turned on or blinked). May be good. By notifying the player using the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation state or the setting change state is preferable. The special symbol display devices 4A and 4B may be different in the setting confirmation state and the setting change state.

If the power is turned off during the execution of the setting change process, the setting change process is executed again and the updated setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) unless the setting change is completed. , You may make an error. Specifically, at the start of the setting change process, the setting change flag (which is not erased even if the RAM is cleared) is stored in the same backup RAM as the backup RAM that stores the setting value, and the setting change is performed at the end of the setting change process. When the flag is turned off and a process other than the setting change process (for example, the game control main process) is executed, if the setting change flag is on, an error occurs. As described above, in a situation where the setting change process does not proceed normally in the middle, the clerk of the amusement park may mistakenly think that the setting change has been completed even though it has not been completed. In such a case, it is possible to guarantee the reliable completion of the setting change by setting an error if the setting change is not completed.

Further, in step 120AKSA08, the current set value is read from the backup RAM and the set value is displayed. However, when the backup to the backup RAM is not performed normally, the image display device 5 is displayed with information indicating that an error occurs, and the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are displayed in a mode different from that during the normal game. (For example, if all the segments of the 7-segment LED are turned off, or if all the lights are turned on during the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, all the blinking may occur).

FIG. 9-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a process executed when the power is turned on. In this feature unit 112IW, as shown in FIG. 9-8, when the setting key 112IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (furthermore, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, the setting change process (steps 120AKSA08 to 120AKSA13, etc.) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process (steps 120AKSA08, 120AKSA13, etc.) is executed. If the setting key 112IW051 is off when the power is turned on, the initialization process (step 120AKSA20, etc.) is executed if the clear switch is on, and the recovery process (step 112IWS024) is executed if the clear switch is off. Is executed.

In this embodiment, in the game control main processing shown in FIGS. 9-5 to 9-7, branching is performed according to the state of the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch (RAM clear flag) while sharing some of the processing. In, the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, the initialization process, or the recovery process has been executed, but each of them may be modularized and executed as an individual process.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (A) and 9-9 (B), when the power is turned off (power is cut off) by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 ends. If the big winning opening is being opened during a big hit game or the like at the timing when the power is turned off, the big winning opening is closed by stopping the supply of electric power to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (C), when the clerk of the game hall or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (in the case of Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that the setting value is set to, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (D), the CPU 103 each time it detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 112IW052 by a clerk of the amusement park or the like. The numerical value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, every time the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is operated, it is updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → ...).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (E), the CPU 103 sets the set value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 to the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 112IW051 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park or the like. Store (update storage) in the backup area of. At this time, the CPU 103 tells the display monitor 112IW029, based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio of the set values set at that time. Display base 1 and base 2. Also, RAM
When the hold storage is stored in the backup area of 102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the big prize opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 9-9 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. As the memory of the jackpot is erased, the jackpot remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 finishes the setting change process, and is in a state where the game can be played, that is, a lottery for determining the fluctuation display result, the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (F), the CPU 103 displays "EE" on the display monitor 112IW029 based on the occurrence of an error in the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored. It is possible to make it.

In the setting change process in the feature unit 112IW, a mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. As the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process, the setting value most disadvantageous to the player (“1” in the case of the feature unit 112IW) or the most advantageous to the player. The set value (“3” in the case of this feature unit 112IW) may be displayed.

(Explanation of feature 53AK)
Subsequently, the feature unit 53AK will be described. The setting of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 53AK can be changed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 whose settings can be changed, it is possible to set any of a plurality of set values, and it is possible to control the advantageous state (big hit game state) at different ratios according to the set set values. In the feature unit 53AK, it is possible to execute a notice effect that gives notice / suggests that the display result will be a big hit (controlled in the big hit game state) during the execution of the variable display.

When the variable display is started, the advance notice effect is determined in the variable display start setting process of step S171 shown in FIG. 7 depending on whether or not the display result is a big hit. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 whose setting can be changed, the larger the setting value, the higher the probability of a big hit. The notice effect (especially the highly reliable notice effect that becomes a big hit) is easy to be executed when the display result becomes a big hit, so if the execution presence or absence is determined at an equal ratio regardless of the set value, the set value The higher the value, the higher the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect. In this embodiment, the reliability refers to the jackpot reliability, and refers to the ratio of jackpots when the advance notice effect is executed.

Therefore, there is a risk that the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect may differ from the intended ones due to blurring due to the set value, or the reliability may change and the player may be confused. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 53AK, by adjusting (changing) the execution rate of the advance notice effect according to the set value, at least one of the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect is the same or substantially the same range. Adjusted within. As a result, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect can be intended, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the advance notice effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent the set value from being unnecessarily suggested depending on the execution frequency of the advance notice effect.

In addition, when adjusting the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect, it may be difficult to completely match the ratio after the decimal point. Therefore, the invention according to the feature portion 53AK includes not only those having the same appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect but also those adjusted within substantially the same range. It should be noted that if the range is substantially the same, the same effect as in the case of the same can be obtained. The substantially same range may be within a predetermined range, within a predetermined error range (for example, plus or minus 5%, etc.), or the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect perceived by the player. May be within substantially the same range so that they are perceived to be the same.

FIG. 10-1 is a diagram showing an example of the execution rate, the appearance rate, and the reliability of the notice X as the notice effect of the feature unit 53AK. FIG. 10-1 (A) shows an example in the case where the appearance rate and reliability of the notice X are not adjusted. In this embodiment, three stages of "1" to "3" are provided as set values. As shown in FIG. 10-1 (A), in this embodiment, the jackpot probability a is "1/300" when the set value is "1", "1/250" when the set value is "2", and the set value. In the case of "3", it is "1/200". The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of a big hit is "50/100" regardless of the set value. Therefore, the ratio (ratio to total variation) A (= jackpot probability a × execution ratio b) when the notice X is executed and becomes a big hit is “1/600” when the set value is “1” and the set value “2”. In the case of, it is "1/500", and in the case of the set value "3", it is "1/400".

The loss probability c (= 1-big hit probability a) is "299/300" when the set value is "1", "249/250" when the set value is "2", and "199" when the set value is "3". / 200 ". The execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss is "1/100". Therefore, the rate (ratio to total variation) B (= loss probability c × execution rate d) at which the notice X is executed and becomes a loss is about “1/100” at any set value.

The appearance rate C (= A + B) of the notice X in total variation is "7/600" when the set value is "1", "6/500" when the set value is "2", and "5" when the set value is "3". It is "/ 400". The reliability D (= A / C) of the notice X is "1/7" (about 14%) when the set value is "1" and "1/6" (about 17%) when the set value is "2". ), When the set value is "3", it is "1/5" (20%).

In this way, when the execution rate of the notice effect (notice X) is the same regardless of the set value without adjustment, the higher the set value, the higher the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect. In particular, when the reliability is based on the case of the set value "2", an error of about plus or minus 3% occurs.

FIG. 10-1 (B) shows an example when the appearance rate and reliability of the notice X are adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), unlike the example shown in FIG. 10-1 (A), the execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of a big hit is "60/100" when the set value is "1". When the set value is "2", it is "50/100", and when the set value is "3", it is "40/100". Further, the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss is "3/299" when the set value is "1", "2.5 / 249" when the set value is "2", and "2" when the set value is "3". / 199 ".

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice X in total variation becomes "6/500" regardless of the set value. Further, the reliability D of the notice X is "1/6" regardless of the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect from changing according to the set value, resulting in an unintended ratio, and the advance notice effect can be preferably executed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the advance notice effect.

In this embodiment, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice X are adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value as the notice effect, but a comparison like the notice X among a plurality of types of notice effects is made. Such adjustments are made for highly reliable notice effects and special notice effects (that is, some notice effects) that are the highlights, and for other notice effects, the execution ratio is not adjusted, depending on the set value. The appearance rate and reliability may be changed. That is, other notice effects may be executed at the same execution ratio regardless of the set value. By doing so, compared to the case where the appearance rate and reliability are adjusted for all the notice effects, the burden of adjusting the appearance rate and reliability is generated, and the processing burden of determining whether or not the notice effects are executed is generated. Can be prevented from increasing.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss is different, but even if they are the same as shown in FIG. 10-1 (A), the notice X is The rate B that is executed and becomes a loss is "1/100", which is substantially the same for all the set values, and the appearance rate C of the notice X is also substantially the same (about 1.17% to 1.25%). , The execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

In this case, by adjusting only the execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of a big hit, the appearance rate C and the reliability D of the notice X can be set to the same or substantially the same range. In this way, by making the execution rate of the notice effect at the time of loss, which accounts for most of the total variation, common, it is not necessary to determine the set value for each change of loss and make the execution rate different. The control burden for executing is reduced.

FIG. 10-1 (C) shows an example when the appearance rates of the notice X are adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 10-1 (C), unlike the example shown in FIG. 10-1 (A), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss is "2.5 / 299" when the set value is "1". , "2/249" when the set value is "2", and "1.5 / 199" when the set value is "3". The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of a big hit remains "50/100" regardless of the set value.

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice X in total variation becomes "1/100" regardless of the set value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or suggesting the set value unnecessarily depending on the execution frequency of the advance notice effect. Further, the occupancy rate of the notice X in the case of a big hit can be made common, and a suitable appearance rate in the case of a big hit can be maintained.

In this case, the appearance rate C of the notice X is common regardless of the set value, but as shown in FIG. 10-1 (C), the reliability of the notice X changes according to the set value. Become. By doing so, it is possible to provide playability according to the set value. Further, as the number of appearances of the notice X increases, the reliability can be estimated and the set value can also be estimated, so that the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be expected to improve. By matching the appearance rates, the reliability according to the set value may change relatively large (about plus or minus 10%) such as 30% to 50%. This makes it easier to guess the set value.

FIG. 10-1 (D) shows an example in which the reliability of the notice X is adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 10-1 (D), unlike the example shown in FIG. 10-1 (A), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss is "2.5 / 299" when the set value is "1". , "2.5 / 249" when the set value is "2", and "2.5 / 199" when the set value is "3". The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of a big hit remains "50/100" regardless of the set value.

By doing so, the reliability D of the notice X becomes "1/6" regardless of the set value. By doing so, the same reliability can be notified by the notice X regardless of the set value. Further, the occupancy rate of the notice X in the case of a big hit can be made common, and a suitable appearance rate in the case of a big hit can be maintained.

In this case, the reliability D of the notice X is common regardless of the set value, but as shown in FIG. 10-1 (D), the appearance rate of the notice X changes according to the set value. Become. By doing so, it is possible to provide playability according to the set value. Further, as the number of appearances of the notice X increases, the set value can be estimated, so that the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be expected to improve.

In addition, in FIG. 10-1 (D), the reliability of the notice X is adjusted to be the same regardless of the set value by making the execution rate of the notice X at the time of loss different according to the set value. However, by assuming that the execution rate of the notice X at the time of loss is the same regardless of the set value and the execution rate of the notice X at the time of a big hit is different according to the set value, the reliability of the notice X is the same regardless of the set value. It may be adjusted so as to be. In this way, by making the execution rate of the notice effect at the time of loss, which accounts for most of the total variation, common, it is not necessary to determine the set value for each change of loss and make the execution rate different. The control burden for executing is reduced.

The jackpot probabilities a shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A) to 10-1 (D) and the adjustment examples of the advance notice execution ratios b and d are examples. In order to make at least one of the appearance rate C and the reliability D the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set value, the appearance rate C and the reliability D should be the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set value. In addition, at least one of the advance notice execution ratios b and d may be changed according to the set value. That is, when the appearance rate C is the same (substantially the same), the execution rate of the notice is such that the appearance rate C = a × b + (1-a) × d is the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set value. At least one of b and d may be adjusted. When the reliability D of the advance notice effect is the same (substantially the same), the reliability D of the advance notice effect D = (a × b) / (a × b + (1-a) × d) regardless of the set value. At least one of the advance notice execution ratios b and d may be adjusted so that they are the same (substantially the same).

In the execution ratio shown in FIG. 10-1, the execution ratio according to the jackpot type was not considered, but when there are a plurality of jackpot types, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect (notice X) is set according to the jackpot type. It may be different. For example, the jackpot probability a is the same as that shown in FIG. 10-1, and there are normal jackpots and probabilistic jackpots as jackpot types, and when the jackpot is equal to any of the jackpot types (50%). explain.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (A), the normal jackpot probability a1 and the probability variation jackpot probability a2 are each half of the jackpot probability a in FIG. 10-1. Then, in this example, the execution ratio b1 of the notice X at the time of a normal big hit is "60/100" when the set value is "1", "50/100" when the set value is "2", and the set value "3". In the case, it is "40/100". Therefore, the ratio (ratio to total variation) A1 (= normal jackpot probability a1 x execution ratio b1) at which the notice X is executed and becomes a normal jackpot is "1/1000" regardless of the set value.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (A), the execution ratio b2 of the notice X at the time of the probability variation big hit is 50/100 (unadjusted) regardless of the set value. Therefore, the ratio (ratio to total variation) A2 (= probability variation jackpot probability a2 x execution ratio b2) when the notice X is executed and becomes a probability variation jackpot is "1/1200" when the set value is "1", and the set value " In the case of "2", it is "1/1000", and in the case of the set value "3", it is "1/800". Then, the ratio (ratio to total variation) A (= A1 + A2) in which the notice X is executed and becomes a big hit is "44/24000" when the set value is "1" and "48/24000" when the set value is "2". , In the case of the set value "3", it is "54/24000".

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss is “196 / (299 × 80)” when the set value is “1” and “2” when the set value is “2”. 192 / (249 × 96) ”, and in the case of the set value“ 3 ”, it is“ 186 / (199 × 120) ”. Therefore, the rate at which the notice X is executed and the result is lost (ratio to the total variation) is "196/24000" when the set value is "1", "192/24000" when the set value is "2", and the set value " In the case of "3", it is "186/24000".

As a result of the above, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), the appearance rate C (= A + B) of the notice X in total variation is "1/100" regardless of the set value. In this way, when there are multiple jackpot types, by making the execution rate of the notice effect different for each jackpot type, the appearance rate of the notice effect can be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. It may be. By doing so, when the advance notice effect is executed while the execution rate of the advance notice effect is within the same or substantially the same range, the ratio of which jackpot type is used differs depending on the set value. It is expected that a specific jackpot (for example, a probabilistic jackpot) will be obtained by executing the advance notice effect.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-2, the appearance rate of the notice X was adjusted to be the same (substantially the same) by making the execution rate of the notice X at the time of a normal big hit different, but other big hit types and loss. The appearance rate C of the notice X may be adjusted to be the same (substantially the same) by making the execution rate of the time different. That is, d may be adjusted with at least one of the advance notice execution rates b1 and b2 so that the appearance rate C = a1 × b1 + a2 × b2 + c × d of the notice X is the same (substantially the same).

Further, the reliability D of the notice X may be the same (substantially the same) by making the execution rate of the notice X different according to the jackpot type. In this case, the reliability D = (a1 × b1 + a2 × b2) / (a1 × b1 + a2 × b2 + ((1-a1-a2) × d)) of the advance notice effect is the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set value. As described above, at least one of the advance notice execution ratios b1 and b2 and d may be adjusted. By doing so, the advance notice effect is executed while keeping the reliability of the advance notice effect within the same or substantially the same range. In this case, since the ratio of which jackpot type is selected differs depending on the set value, it is expected that a specific jackpot (for example, a probabilistic jackpot) will be obtained by executing the advance notice effect according to the set value.

Further, for some of the advance notice effects, the execution rate of the specific jackpot type may be executed at the same execution rate regardless of the set value. For example, there are two types of jackpots, a normal jackpot and a probabilistic jackpot (50% of the distribution of the jackpot type), and as a preview effect, a notice Y for notifying that the jackpot will be a probabilistic jackpot may be executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the case of a normal big hit or loss, the execution rate of the notice Y is 0/100 (0%) regardless of the set value. On the other hand, the execution rate b2 of the notice Y at the time of the probability variation big hit is "60/100" when the set value is "1", "50/100" when the set value is "2", and "40 / 100" when the set value is "3". It is "100". The jackpot probability is the same as the example shown in FIG. 10-1. Therefore, the appearance rate of the total variation notice Y is "1/1000" regardless of the set value. By doing so, it is possible to execute the notice Y notifying that the probability variation jackpot will occur at the time of the probability variation jackpot at the same appearance rate regardless of the set value. In addition, it can be announced that it will be a probable change jackpot regardless of the set value. Further, in the case of a normal big hit, the notice Y is not executed regardless of the set value, so that the processing load can be reduced. Although not shown, the reliability is 100% because the notice Y is executed only at the time of the probability change big hit.

A notice effect for notifying that it will be a probable big hit may be executed at the time of loss. For example, as a notice effect, when the notice Z for notifying that the probability variation big hit will be executed is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the case of the normal big hit, the execution rate of the notice Z is 0 regardless of the set value. It becomes / 100 (0%). On the other hand, the execution rate b2 of the notice Z at the time of the probabilistic big hit is the same as the execution rate of the notice Y shown in FIG. 10-3, and the rate at which the notice Z is executed and becomes a big hit is "1" regardless of the set value. It is "/ 1000". The execution ratio d of the notice Z at the time of loss is "3/2990" when the set value is "1", "2.5 / 2490" when the set value is "2", and "2" when the set value is "3". / 1990 ". The ratio B at which the notice Y is executed and the result is lost is "1/1000" in any of the set values.

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice Z in total variation becomes "2/1000" regardless of the set value. Further, the reliability D of the notice Z is "1/2" regardless of the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate and reliability of the notice Z from changing according to the set value and becoming an unintended ratio, and if a big hit occurs, a notice that the probability change big hit will be announced. Z can be preferably performed. Further, in the case of a normal big hit, the notice Z is not executed regardless of the set value, so that the processing load can be reduced. It should be noted that either the appearance rate of the notice Z or the reliability may differ depending on the set value.

Subsequently, an example of the effect operation of the advance notice effect in 53AK will be described. The lower arrow in FIG. 10-5 (A) indicates that the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" of the image display device 5. It shows that there is. When it is decided to execute the advance notice X as the advance notice effect, the character image 53AK001 as shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) is a line saying "chance" during the execution of each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. Notice X is executed. This allows the player to recognize that there is a high possibility that the player will be controlled in an advantageous state. In particular, when the reliability is adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value, the player can recognize that there is a high possibility that the player will be controlled in an advantageous state without being aware of the set value. ..

After that, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (C), the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R stop, and reach is established. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (D), the characters "Super Reach!" Are displayed, and for example, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (E), the reach effect of the super reach in which the characters confront each other is displayed. To be started. During the reach effect of the super reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (E), the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and executed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5.

Then, for example, immediately before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (F), the notice Y or the notice Z in which the character image 53AK002 issues the line "probability change !?" is executed. To. As a result, the player expects to be a probabilistic jackpot. In particular, if it is a notice Y, it will be confirmed that it will be a probable change jackpot, so that the interest will be improved.

In addition, when both the notice Y and the notice Z can be executed, it is a production that gives a notice and suggests that both of them will be a probable change jackpot, but the display color and the lines of the lines are so that the player can distinguish them. It is preferable to make some production modes such as contents different.

After that, when the display result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (G), it is displayed that the ally character has won, and as shown in FIG. 10-5 (H), with the big hit combination. The decorative pattern is derived and displayed. It should be noted that the effect mode of the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 10-5 is an example, and any effect mode may be used as long as it can suggest and give notice of a big hit or a probabilistic big hit.

(Modification example of feature part 53AK)
The feature portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above-described embodiment are essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. Moreover, you may combine this feature part and other feature part as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, three stages of 1 to 3 are provided as the set value, but the set value may be 2 stages or less or 4 stages or more (for example, 6 stages). Further, the larger the set value is, the more advantageous the jackpot probability is for the player, but the smaller the set value is, the more advantageous the jackpot probability is for the player. Further, the jackpot probability according to the set value shown in FIG. 10-1 and the like is also an example, and it is sufficient that the jackpot probability is stepwise according to the set value.

In the above embodiment, the execution rate of the advance notice effect is set to the set value so that at least one of the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect of all the set values (set values 1 to 3) is within the same or substantially the same range. It was changed (adjusted) according to it, but of the multiple types of setting values, at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect of some setting values should be within the same or substantially the same range. You may. For example, even if at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect of the first set value (for example, set value 1) and the second set value (for example, set value 2) is within the same or substantially the same range. Good. Further, when the set value is in 6 stages, at least one of the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect of the first set value group (for example, set values 1 to 3) is set to be the same or substantially the same range. , At least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect of the second set value group (for example, set values 4 to 6) may be the same or substantially the same range.

In the above embodiment, as the specific effect, the appearance rate and reliability of at least a part of the notice effects are set to be the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value, but the specific effect is controlled to an advantageous state. It may be another production that suggests that. For example, when the type of reach effect and the number of pseudo-reams are determined on the side of the effect control board 12, the type of reach effect and the determination ratio of the number of pseudo-reams are different depending on the set value. The appearance rate and reliability of each reach effect, and the appearance rate and reliability of each pseudo-ream number may be controlled to be the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value.

Further, when determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect, a table to which different execution ratios are assigned to each set value may be used to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect, or to determine the advance notice effect. A reference table may be provided, a table corresponding to the set value may be calculated in the table, and a table corresponding to the set value may be generated, and whether or not the advance notice effect is executed may be determined using the generated table.

The execution ratio, appearance rate, and reliability of the advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4 are examples, and can be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Further, as the notice effect, a notice effect other than the notice effect shown in the above embodiment may be feasible. In such other notice effects, the appearance rate and reliability may be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set value, and some or all of the other notice effects may be set to the set value. Regardless, the appearance rate and reliability may be changed according to the set value as the same execution rate. For example, among the notice effects, for the notice effects with relatively high reliability, the appearance rate and reliability are set to be the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value, and the reliability is relatively low or the appearance rate is low. For high notice effects, the same execution rate may be used regardless of the set value. By doing so, the control burden regarding the determination of whether or not to execute the advance notice effect is reduced as compared with the case where the appearance rate and the reliability are the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value for all the advance notice effects. Can be mitigated.

In addition, for a specific advance notice effect among a plurality of types of advance notice effects, it is executed even if some setting values are lost, and if it is another set value, it is not executed (or is executed) if it is lost. It may be difficult). For example, a specific advance notice effect with high reliability (for example, jackpot probability of 90% or more) is not executed at the time of loss in the case of a low setting value (for example, 1 to 3 in the case of 6 stages), and a high setting value (for example, In the case of 4 to 6) in the case of 6 steps, it may be possible to execute at the time of loss. By doing so, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect by losing even though the specific advance notice effect is executed, and it is possible to suggest and notify that the set value is high.

In the figures shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2, the execution ratio of the notice X is shown as the notice effect, but after deciding whether or not to execute the notice effect according to the display result, the type of the notice effect (effect pattern). ) May be determined. In this case, when determining the type of advance notice effect, the execution ratio of each advance notice effect is set to the set value so that the appearance rate and reliability of each advance notice effect are within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. It may be different depending on it.

In the above embodiment, whether or not the advance notice is executed is determined regardless of the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss, but at the time of loss, depending on the fluctuation pattern (presence / absence and type of reach, presence / absence and number of pseudo-reams), The execution ratio of the advance notice effect may be different.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability in the probabilistic state is not considered, but even in the probabilistic state, the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. Further, depending on the game state, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. For example, in a probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability of a big hit is high and the advance notice effect is easily executed, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect are adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. Such adjustment may not be performed in the normal state (low probability state). Further, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect (specific advance notice effect) may be different between different gaming states, or may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range. For example, if it is difficult to distinguish between the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state due to the common background, etc. ) May be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range. Further, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect (specific notice effect) may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game state in which the appearance is indistinguishable from being recognized depending on the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect.

In the above embodiment, when there are a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot as the jackpot type, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect are adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value according to the jackpot type. It was. The difference in the jackpot type may be the difference in the number of rounds of the jackpot, or the difference in the length of the time saving state or the probability variation state controlled by the jackpot gaming state.

When a small hit is provided as a display result and a notice effect is executed even when a small hit occurs, the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of a big hit or a loss is made different according to the set value as in the above embodiment. In addition, by making the execution rate of the advance notice effect at the time of a small hit different according to the set value, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. .. For example, in a gaming machine in which a specific area is provided in the winning opening opened in the small hit game state and the game machine is controlled to the big hit game state based on passing through the specific area in the small hit game state, it is announced that the small hit will be obtained. Since it can be said that the advance notice effect is a big hit, the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect for notifying the small hit may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. In this case, when the small hit probability is changed according to the set value, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect are changed by changing the execution rate of the notice effect in consideration of the small hit probability according to the set value. You can adjust the degree. Specifically, by considering the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability according to the set value, the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of the big hit, the small hit, and the loss is made different according to the set value. The appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value.

If the advance notice effect can be executed for each of the multiple variations of the pseudo-ream, the appearance rate and reliability are adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value only for the advance notice effect in the final change of the pseudo-ream. You may. By doing so, it is possible to easily design the advance notice effect and reduce the processing load as compared with the case of adjusting the appearance rate and the reliability for all the fluctuations of the pseudo-ream.

In the above embodiment, only the jackpot probability changes depending on the set value, but the effect mode and the effect execution ratio may be different depending on the set value on the effect control board 12. For example, even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, different reach effects, pseudo-reams, and other effects during variable display may be executed based on the set values. By doing so, it is possible to suggest a set value for the effect mode by the execution rate of the effect.

A part or all of the configuration of the embodiment and the configuration of the modified example according to the feature portion 53AK may be appropriately combined.

(Explanation of means related to feature 53AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 53AK is
It can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3 or set values 1 to 6, etc.), and is in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot) that is advantageous to the player at a different ratio depending on the set set value. A gaming machine that can be controlled to the gaming state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature portion 53AK).
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, notice X, notice Y, notice Z, etc.) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state is provided.
The specific effect executing means has an appearance rate of the specific effect when the set value is the first set value and an appearance of the specific effect when the set value is a second set value different from the first set value. The specific effect is executed so that the rate and the rate are within the same or substantially the same range (for example, FIGS. 10-1 (B) and 10-3, FIGS. 10-2 to 10-3).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect can be executed at a common appearance rate regardless of the set value, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The specific effect executing means makes the execution ratio of the specific effect when it is not controlled to the advantageous state different according to a set value (for example, FIGS. 10-1 (B), (C), 10-2, 10). -4) You may do so.
According to such a configuration, the appearance rate of the specific effect can be suitably adjusted while maintaining the appearance rate of the specific effect when controlled in an advantageous state.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
The specific effect executing means makes the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the advantageous state different according to the set value (for example, FIGS. 10-1 (B), 10-2 to 10-4). You may do so.
According to such a configuration, the appearance rate of the specific effect can be preferably adjusted.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above
The ratio (for example, reliability) controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed is within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 10-1 (B), 10). -3, Fig. 10-4).
According to such a configuration, it is suggested that the specific effect is executed with the same appearance rate and reliability regardless of the set value, and the control is performed in an advantageous state, so that the interest is improved.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed may be changed depending on the set value (for example, FIGS. 10-1 (C) and 10-2).
According to such a configuration, the appearance rate of the specific effect is adjusted, but the reliability is changed, so that it is possible to provide a game playability in which the reliability is estimated, and the interest is improved.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
There are multiple types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may make the execution ratio of the specific effect different depending on the set value for each type of the controlled advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 10-2 to 10-4).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that a specific advantageous state will be obtained according to the set value by executing the specific effect, and the interest will be improved. In addition, it is possible to suggest a set value depending on the type of specific effect, which improves the interest.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
There are multiple types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may not change the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the specific advantageous state regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 10-2 to 10-4).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that a specific advantageous state will be obtained regardless of the set value by executing the specific effect, and the interest will be improved.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 54AK)
Further, the feature portion 53AK includes an invention relating to the feature portion 54AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 54AK is
It can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3 or set values 1 to 6, etc.), and is in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot) that is advantageous to the player at a different ratio depending on the set set value. A gaming machine that can be controlled to the gaming state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature portion 54AK).
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, notice X, notice Y, notice Z, etc.) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state is provided.
The specific effect executing means has a rate of being controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed when the set value is the first set value, and a second setting value different from the first set value. The specific effect is executed so that the ratio controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed at the set value is within the same or substantially the same range (for example, FIG. 10-1 (Fig. 10-1). B), (D), FIG. 10-4).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect can be executed with a common reliability (ratio controlled to an advantageous state) regardless of the set value, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The specific effect executing means makes the execution ratio of the specific effect when it is not controlled to the advantageous state different according to the set value (for example, FIGS. 10-1 (B), (D), 10-4). You may.
According to such a configuration, the reliability of the specific effect can be suitably adjusted while maintaining the appearance rate of the specific effect when controlled in an advantageous state.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
The specific effect executing means may have different execution ratios of the specific effect when controlled to the advantageous state according to a set value (for example, FIGS. 10-1 (B) and 10-4). ..
According to such a configuration, the reliability of the specific effect can be suitably adjusted.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above
The appearance rate of the specific effect may be within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 10-1 (B), 10-3, 10-4).
According to such a configuration, it is suggested that the specific effect is executed with the same appearance rate and reliability regardless of the set value, and the control is performed in an advantageous state, so that the interest is improved.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above
The appearance rate of the specific effect may be changed depending on the set value (for example, FIG. 10-1 (D)).
According to such a configuration, the reliability of the specific effect is adjusted, but the appearance rate changes, so that the interest is improved.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
There are multiple types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may make the execution ratio of the specific effect different depending on the set value for each type of the controlled advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 10-2 to 10-4).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that a specific advantageous state will be obtained according to the set value by executing the specific effect, and the interest will be improved. In addition, it is possible to suggest a set value depending on the type of specific effect, which improves the interest.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
There are multiple types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may not change the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the specific advantageous state regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 10-2 to 10-4).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that a specific advantageous state will be obtained regardless of the set value by executing the specific effect, and the interest will be improved.

(Explanation of feature 57AK)
Subsequently, the feature 57AK will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 57AK can display a hold display corresponding to the held variable display before execution and an active display corresponding to the variable display during execution as specific displays corresponding to the variable display. In addition, it is possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect (hold change notice) that changes the display mode of the hold display or the active display.

In addition, it is possible to execute a zone effect that shifts to the effect zone, which indicates that the effect state is different from the normal effect state (when the power is turned on, etc.) and is advantageous for the player. During the zone effect, the image display device 5 is displayed to indicate that the zone has been moved to the zone on the effect. The zone effect can be executed over a plurality of variable displays, and can notify that the player is in an advantageous state over the plurality of variable displays. Such a zone effect is also executed as a look-ahead advance notice effect indicating that it is advantageous (high hit reliability, etc.) based on the variable display before execution.

In this embodiment, a display change high probability zone indicating that the display mode of the specific display is likely to change is provided as a zone for the effect. The zone effect of the display change high probability zone is also called a specific effect. In the case of the display change high probability zone (during execution of the specific effect), the pending change notice is executed and the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than in the case of not in the display change high probability zone. As a result, in the case of the display change high probability zone, the player can expect that the display mode of the specific display changes, that is, a big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 57AK, by shifting from the display change high probability zone to the normal effect state, the display mode changes in the display change high probability zone even after the display change high probability zone (execution of the specific effect) is completed. The display mode of the specific display is more likely to change due to the execution of the pending change notice than the specific display in which the display mode does not change in the display change high probability zone. As a result, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will change further even after the display change high probability zone ends, so that the player's expectations can be suppressed while suppressing the player's disappointment due to the end of the display change high probability zone. The feeling can be maintained and the interest of the game is improved.

In the feature unit 57AK, in addition to the display change high probability zone as a production zone, a chance zone indicating that the probability of becoming a big hit is high is provided. The zone production of the chance zone is also called a special production. As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of zones are provided, and it is possible to shift to any zone as a zone effect. The details of the chance zone will be described later.

FIG. 11-1 is a diagram showing an example of the production operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature portion 57AK. In FIG. 11-1 (A), the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 "left", "middle", and "right" by the downward arrow. It shows that there is. The image display device 5 is provided with an active display area 57AK001 for displaying the active display and a hold display area 57AK002 for displaying the hold display. In the hold display area 57AK002, up to four hold displays can be displayed corresponding to the maximum number of holds, and the right side corresponds to the old hold information and the left side corresponds to the new hold information. When the variable display ends and the next variable display is executed, the active display is erased and all specific displays (hold display and active display) are shifted to the right.

In FIG. 11-1 (A), two hold displays are displayed. Here, the active display and the hold display are all displayed as white circles, which is a normal mode. In addition, the zone effect has not been executed, and the effect is normal.

Here, when the game ball enters the winning ball device 6A, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (B), the hold display is increased by one to a total of three. Further, since it is decided to shift to the display change high probability zone here, the zone display 57AK003 indicating that the display change high probability zone is displayed is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5, and is controlled by the display change high probability zone. To.

After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (C), at the timing when the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and the hold display (specific display) shifts, the image of the star with respect to the second hold display. An effect (change suggestion effect) in which 57AK004 moves and acts (collisions) is executed. In the display change high probability zone, it is suggested that the display mode of the hold display (specific display) of the action target changes (the hold change notice is executed) by such a change suggestion effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (D), the display mode of the hold display, which is the target of the change suggestion effect, changes to, for example, blue.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (E), at the timing when the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and the hold display (specific display) shifts, the change suggestion effect is applied to the first hold display. Will be executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (F), the display mode of the hold display, which is the target of the change suggestion effect, changes to, for example, green.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (G), the change suggestion effect is executed for the active display at the timing when the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and the first hold display shifts to the active display. To. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (H), the display mode of the active display, which is the target of the change suggestion effect, changes to, for example, purple.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (I), the change suggestion effect is executed for the active display at the timing when the reach is established in the variable display corresponding to the active display. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (J), the display mode of the active display, which is the target of the change suggestion effect, changes to, for example, red. At this time, the zone display 57AK003 is erased, and the control to the display change high probability zone ends. As described above, in this embodiment, the display change high probability zone ends in the middle of the variable display of the target (variable display corresponding to the start winning prize that triggered the execution of the zone effect).

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (K), at the timing of developing to super reach, the display mode of the active display changes to, for example, gold without executing the change suggestion effect.

In this way, when the zone shifts to the display change high probability zone, the display mode of the specific display is likely to change. Therefore, by shifting to the display change high probability zone, the player can expect that the display mode of the specific display will change or become a big hit. Further, even after the display change high probability zone ends, the change timing of the specific display (Fig. 11-1 (K)) is provided, and the display mode has changed before the end of the display change high probability zone. Is more likely to change the display mode even after the end of the display change high probability zone than the specific display in which the display mode has not changed. As a result, the player's disappointment due to the end of the display change high probability zone can be suppressed, and the player's expectation can be maintained even after the display change high probability zone ends, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Display change Even if it is not in the high probability zone, the hold display notice may be executed and the display mode of the specific display may change. However, the specific display whose display mode has changed in the display change high probability zone is more likely to change in the display mode than the specific display in which the display mode has changed when the display change high probability zone is not provided. That is, the number of times the specific display changes is likely to increase during the display change high probability zone. As a result, during the display change high probability zone, many successful experiences such as a change in the display mode of the specific display can be enjoyed, so that the interest in the display change high probability zone can be improved. It should be noted that the specific display whose display mode has changed in the case of the display change high probability zone is more than the specific display in which the display mode has changed even after the display change high probability zone ends. The display mode is easy to change. As a result, the player's disappointment due to the end of the display change high probability zone can be suppressed, and the player's expectation can be maintained even after the display change high probability zone ends, so that the interest of the game is improved.

In this embodiment, the change timing of the display mode of the specific display is the time when the specific display is shifted and the predetermined timing during the active display. Further, in this embodiment, a change suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the specific display changes is executed. In particular, during the display change high probability zone, it is always executed at all timings where the specific display can change. In addition, in FIG. 11-1, the display mode of the specific display always changes (change succeeds) after the change suggestion effect is executed, but it may not change (change fails). .. That is, there are cases where the change suggestion effect is not good. By doing so, it is possible to effectively incite the change in the display mode of the specific display in the display change high probability zone, and the effect of the effect is improved.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the change suggestion effect is not executed unless the display change high probability zone is executed. Even when the display change is not in the high probability zone, the change suggestion effect may be executed. In this case, the execution rate of the change suggestion effect when the zone is not the display change high probability zone may be lower than that when the display change high probability zone is set. For example, by setting the execution rate of the change suggestion effect of Gase when it is not in the display change high probability zone to be lower than that in the case of the display change high probability zone (for example, the change suggestion effect of Gase is not executed), the relative time ratio. May be lowered.

It should be noted that the rate at which the display mode of the specific display changes (success rate) after the change suggestion effect is executed may be different depending on whether the display change high probability zone is not present or not. For example, the success rate may be higher or lower in cases other than the display change high probability zone than in other cases. In addition, a plurality of effect modes of the change suggestion effect may be provided so that the success rate and the rate of the effect mode (number of stages) that change thereafter may differ depending on the effect mode of the change suggestion effect. By doing so, the change suggestion effect becomes various, and the change suggestion effect can effectively arouse the expectation of the player.

Further, when the display change is not in the high probability zone, the execution mode of the change suggestion effect may be different. When it is not the display change high probability zone, the change suggestion effect of a different effect mode may be executed as in the case of the display change high probability zone. By doing so, the effect can be diversified and the effect can be improved.

Regardless of which zone the zone is, the execution rate of the change suggestion effect and the determination rate of the effect mode when the specific display is actually changed may be different. By doing so, in the display change high probability zone, the execution rate of the change suggestion effect is high, and the change suggestion effect of the mode in which the display mode of the specific display changes is high is easy to be executed. In addition, the success rate can be different depending on the presence or absence of the change suggestion effect and the effect mode.

FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart showing the operation of the specific display process for displaying the specific display of the feature unit 57AK and executing the pending change notice. The specific display process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in, for example, the lookahead advance notice setting process in step S161 of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. If the effect operation according to the present invention can be realized, the position (execution timing) of the corresponding display process is not limited to the lookahead advance notice setting process.

In the specific display process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a start winning prize has been generated due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening (step 57AKS001). In the process of step 57AKS001, it may be determined whether or not the start-up prize has occurred, for example, by determining whether or not the effect control command for designating the occurrence of the start-up prize has been received from the main board 11.

When it is determined that a start-up prize has occurred (step 57AKS001; Yes), the final display mode (final display mode) of the specific display corresponding to the start-up prize and the process of changing the display mode of the specific display (pending change notice) The display change pattern corresponding to the effect mode) is determined (step 57AKS002).

In the process of step 57AKS002, the display result and the variation category (rough classification of the variation pattern, etc.) are pre-read based on the effect control command for specifying the determination result of the look-ahead determination received at the start winning, and the final display mode and display are displayed. The change pattern is determined. In the process of step 57AKS002, the final display mode and the display change pattern are determined to determine whether or not the pending change notice is executed and the effect mode thereof. In this embodiment, a pending change notice in which the display mode changes a plurality of times may be executed between the time when the specific display is displayed and the time when the variable display corresponding to the specific display ends, but the final display mode After determining, the display change pattern (change process) corresponding to the final display mode is determined.

In step 57AKS002, first, the final display mode is determined according to the display result at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-3, for example. In this embodiment, as a display mode (display color) of the specific display, as shown in FIG. 11-3, "white" which is a normal mode before the execution of the change effect and a notice mode which changes due to the pending change notice are used. Display modes of "blue", "green", "purple", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are provided. Then, as shown in the determination ratio of FIG. 11-3, the display result (variable category) is different depending on which of "non-reach", "normal loss", "super reach loss", and "big hit". The final display mode is determined. In the decision ratio shown in FIG. 11-3, there is a possibility that the final display mode will be a big hit in the order of (“white” <) “blue” <“green” <“purple” <“red” <“gold” <“rainbow”. There is a high possibility that (big hit reliability), super reach (super reach reliability), and reach will be established.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-3, the display modes of "white", "blue", "green", "purple", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are set to "rainbow", respectively. It is also referred to as "a", "b", "c", "d", "e", "f], and" g ". In this embodiment, a plurality of display modes of the specific display are provided depending on the difference in color, but a plurality of display modes of the specific display may be provided depending on the difference in shape, pattern, motif, and character. That is, the difference between "a" and "g" may be a difference in shape, pattern, motif, or character.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, when the display mode of the specific display remains "white" (when the final display mode is "white"), there is no big hit, and the big hit reliability is 0%. ing. When the display mode becomes "blue", there is a high possibility that reach will be established. When the display mode is "green", at least reach is established. Further, when the display mode is "purple", it is determined that the display mode is "super reach". However, when the final display mode is "blue" to "purple", the jackpot reliability is low.

When the display mode of the specific display is "red", the jackpot reliability is significantly higher (12 times or more) than in the case of "purple" or less. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the display mode is "red" or higher. When the display mode is "gold", the jackpot reliability is higher (60%), and when the display mode is "rainbow", it is confirmed that the jackpot is a big hit. In addition, since the display mode of "rainbow" is determined only at 7% at the time of big hit (generally 1/300 etc. in the normal state), its appearance rate is low and it is a rare production (premier production). It has become.

As described above, in this embodiment, the display mode of the specific display is subdivided, and eight stages of display modes are provided. Therefore, when the display change high probability zone is reached, the display mode can be designed to be easily changed (the number of changes is large), and the number of times the display can be changed can be increased. Further, in this embodiment, as the change timing (timing that can change) of the display mode of the specific display, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 (A) and 11-4 (B), seven timings “ho 4” and “ho 3” are used. , "Ho 2", "Ho 1", "A 1", "A 2", "A 3" are provided. "Ho 4" is when it is displayed as the fourth hold display. "Holding 3" is when it is displayed as the third hold display (at the time of winning or shifting). "Holding 2" is when it is displayed as the second hold display (at the time of winning or shifting). "Holding 1" is when it is displayed as the first hold display (at the time of winning or shifting). "A1" is when it is displayed as an active display (at the time of winning or shifting). "A2" is when it is displayed as an active display, and changes such as the timing of the first temporary stop of the decorative symbol (when the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped due to the establishment of reach, and when all the symbols are temporarily stopped during the pseudo-continuous time). The timing of the first big hit in the middle, etc.). “A3” is when it is displayed as an active display, and when it develops into super reach (when the reach production of super reach starts, etc.).

As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of change stages and change timings of the specific display are provided. As a result, the frequency with which the display mode of the specific display changes can be increased, and the interest of the pending change notice can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), the control to the display change high probability zone is executed at any timing from "maintenance 4" to "a1" and ends at the timing of "a2". To do. Therefore, "A3" is always outside the display change high probability zone. Since "A3" is used when developing into super reach, etc., by ending the display change high probability zone before developing into super reach, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated, and pay attention to the reach production of super reach. Can be made to. In addition, two or more change timings may be provided outside the display change high probability zone.

In the process of step 57AKS002, after the final display mode is determined, the display change pattern is determined according to the determined final display mode. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of display change patterns corresponding to the scenario of the change of the display mode of the specific display at each change timing are provided, and a plurality of display change patterns corresponding to the final change to the final display mode are provided. It is designed to select and decide from the types.

FIG. 11-5 is a diagram showing a part of the display change pattern of the feature portion 57AK. FIG. 11-5 (A) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is b (blue). As shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), in this embodiment, four types of display change patterns pt2-1, pt2-2, pt2-3, as display change patterns when the final display mode is b (blue). pt2-4 is provided. In FIG. 11-5, the display mode of the specific display at each change timing is shown. For example, the display change pattern pt2-1 is displayed in a (white) from "maintenance 4" to "a1", and indicates that it changes from a (white) to b (blue) in "a2". Further, the display change pattern pt2-4 indicates that "main 4" to "a3" are displayed in b (blue).

When determining the display change pattern, one of the display change patterns is determined regardless of the current number of pending memories (that is, the number of pending display or active display at the time of winning). There is. Therefore, when the display change pattern is determined to be past the change timing when the display mode changes (when the number of reserved memories is less than the change timing when the display mode changes), the specific display is displayed in the changed display mode. Is displayed. In addition, FIG. 11-5 also shows the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display, and the number of changes when the final display mode is b (blue) depends on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern. It will be 0 times or 1 time. For example, when the number of reserved memories is 2 or less and the display change pattern pt2-3 is determined, it is displayed in b "blue" from beginning to end, and the number of changes is 0.

FIG. 11-5 (B) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is c (green). As shown in FIG. 11-5 (B), in this embodiment, seven types of display change patterns pt3-1 to pt3-7 are provided as display change patterns when the final display mode is c (green). .. As shown in FIG. 11-5 (B), the display mode of the specific display at each change timing is defined for each display change pattern. When the final display mode is c (green), the number of changes is 0 to 2 times depending on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern.

FIG. 11-5 (C) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is e (red). As shown in FIG. 11-5 (C), in this embodiment, 13 types of display change patterns pt5-1 to pt5-13 are provided as display change patterns when the final display mode is e (red). .. As shown in FIG. 11-5 (C), the display mode of the specific display at each change timing is defined for each display change pattern. When the final display mode is e (red), the number of changes is 0 to 4 times depending on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern.

FIG. 11-5 (D) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is g (rainbow). As shown in FIG. 11-5 (D), in this embodiment, 10 types of display change patterns pt7-1 to pt7-10 are provided as display change patterns when the final display mode is g (rainbow). .. As shown in FIG. 11-5 (D), the display mode of the specific display at each change timing is defined for each display change pattern. When the final display mode is g (rainbow), the number of changes is 1 to 6 times depending on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern.

In FIG. 11-5, the display change pattern when the final display mode is b, c, e, g is shown, but a plurality of display change patterns when the final display mode is other are also provided. In the process of step 57AKS002, one of the display change patterns as shown in FIG. 11-5 is determined according to the final display mode. The determination ratio of the display change pattern may be arbitrary, but it may be an equal ratio, or it may be determined at a different ratio depending on the display result. When deciding at different ratios according to the display result, it becomes possible to predict the possibility of a big hit depending on the change timing.

The display change pattern shown in FIG. 11-5 is an example, and a display change pattern other than that shown in FIG. 11-5 may be provided, or the display change pattern shown in FIG. 11-5 may be provided. There may be few types.

In the process of step 57AKS002, after the final display mode of the specific display and the display change pattern corresponding to the change process of the display mode of the specific display are determined, whether or not the zone effect is executed and the type of zone when the zone effect is executed are determined. (Step 57AKS003). As described above, in this embodiment, the effect of controlling the display change high probability zone is executed as the zone effect. In addition, as a zone different from the display change high probability zone, an effect of controlling the chance zone indicating that there is a high possibility of a big hit is also executed. In this embodiment, a normal effect state in which the zone effect is not executed, a display change high probability zone, and a chance zone are provided, and are controlled to any of the zones when the zone effect is executed.

In step 57AKS003, first, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the start winning prize that has occurred this time. FIG. 11-6 (A) shows the determination ratio of whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone. As shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), when the number of changes is 5 or 6, the display change is always shifted to the high probability zone, and when the number of changes is 0 or 1, the display changes. It is designed not to move to the high probability zone. Further, when the number of changes is 2 to 4, the larger the number of changes, the higher the ratio of shifting to the display change high probability zone. By doing so, by controlling the display change high probability zone, the rate at which the specific display changes increases, so that the player's expectation can be improved.

The control to the display change high probability zone ends during the variable display (after the change timing "A2") of the pending change notice, but the number of changes does not matter at which timing the display mode changes. The higher the number, the higher the rate of transition to the display change high probability zone, so it is easy to change the specific display that triggered the zone transition during the display change high probability zone, and of course, control to the display change high probability zone. Even after the end of, the rate of change of the specific display (active display) that triggered the zone transition is high. Therefore, even after the control to the display change high probability zone is completed, the player's expectation can be maintained, and the deterioration of the interest of the game can be prevented.

It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to whether or not the active display changes at the change timing “A3” outside the display change high probability zone. For example, as the number of changes increases, the rate of shifting to the display change high probability zone is increased, and when the active display changes in "A3", the rate of shifting to the display change high probability zone is further increased. May be good. By doing so, when the display change high probability zone is controlled, the rate of change even after the display change high probability zone ends is high, so that the player's expectation after the display change high probability zone ends. You will be able to maintain the feeling more.

If it is determined in step 57AKS003 to control to the display change high probability zone, the process proceeds to step 57AKS004 without deciding whether to control to the chance zone. That is, in this embodiment, the control to the display change high probability zone is prioritized as the zone effect, and when it is determined whether or not the display change high probability zone is controlled and the display change high probability zone is controlled, the chance zone is set to. It is not controlled. The priority of zone production may be reversed. That is, after determining whether or not to control the chance zone, it may be determined whether or not to control the display change high probability zone when it is determined not to control the chance zone.

If it is decided not to control the display change high probability zone, it is decided whether or not to control the chance zone. In this case, it is determined whether or not to shift to the chance zone according to the final display mode of the specific display corresponding to the start winning prize generated this time. FIG. 11-6 (B) shows the decision ratio of whether or not to shift to the chance zone. As shown in FIG. 11-6 (B), when the final display mode is g (rainbow), it is always shifted to the chance zone, and when the final display mode is f (gold), the probability is high ( It shifts to the chance zone at 80%), and does not shift to the chance zone when the final display mode is other than those. By doing so, by being controlled by the chance zone, the specific display is likely to change to a mode with high jackpot reliability, so that the player's expectation can be improved.

The display change high probability zone also has a higher jackpot reliability than in the normal production state, but the chance zone has a higher jackpot reliability than the display change high probability zone (finally, the jackpot reliability). The display mode changes to a high degree). In this way, by providing multiple zones such as a display change high probability zone where the display mode of the specific display is easy to change and a successful experience can be enjoyed, and a chance zone where the jackpot reliability is extremely high, the variation of zone production becomes diverse. The effect of the production is improved, and the interest of the game is improved. It should be noted that although the jackpot reliability is higher than in the case where the chance zone is in the normal production state, the jackpot reliability may be lower than in the display change high probability zone.

Subsequently, the determination results in steps 57AKS002 and 57AKS003 are saved (step 57AKS004), and the control of displaying the specific display in the display mode according to the determination result and the control of shifting to the zone according to the determination result are executed (step 57AKS004). Step 57AKS005). If the control to move to the zone is executed here, the current zone may be set to the value corresponding to the identifiable zone flag. Further, the control for notifying the shift to the zone may be executed by displaying the image corresponding to the zone to be shifted on the image display device 5 or the like.

When it is determined that the start winning has not occurred (step 57AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not it is the shift timing of the hold display (step 57AKS006). Since the hold display shifts when a new variable display is started, in step 57AKS006, for example, depending on whether or not an effect control command for specifying the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11, the hold display shift timing is used. It may be determined whether or not there is.

When it is determined that it is the shift timing of the hold display (step 57AKS006; Yes), the control to delete the hold display of the shift source (step 57AKS007) and the control to display the specific display of the shift destination (hold display or active display) Execute (step 57AKS008). At this time, for example, when the display mode changes at the shift destination with reference to the display change pattern, control for changing the specific display to the display mode specified by the display change pattern is also executed. .. Further, in the case of the display change high probability zone, the control for executing the change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 11-1 is also executed. After that, the specific display process is terminated.

After executing the process of step 57AKS005, or when it is determined that it is not the shift timing of the hold display (step 57AKS006; No), it is determined whether or not it is the change timing of the active display (step 57AKS009). In step 57AKS009, for example, it is determined from the current fluctuation pattern, the value of the timer for measuring the fluctuation time, and the like whether or not the change timing of "A2" and "A3" has come, and the display change pattern is referred to. Then, it may be determined whether or not the display mode of the active display is changed at the reached change timing.

When it is determined that it is the change timing of the active display (step 57AKS009; Yes), control is performed to change the display mode of the active display (step 57AKS010). In step 57AKS010, control for changing the active display to the display mode specified by the display change pattern is executed with reference to, for example, the display change pattern. Further, in the case of the display change high probability zone, the control for executing the change suggestion effect is also executed.

When it is determined that it is not the change timing of the active display (step 57AKS009; No), or after the processing of step 57AKS010 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the zone effect (step 57AKS011). Here, for example, it is determined from the zone flag whether or not the zone effect is being executed, and the end timing of the zone (for example, the display change high probability zone) is determined from the current fluctuation pattern, the timer value for measuring the fluctuation time, and the like. If it is, it is determined whether or not it is "A2", and if it is a chance zone, it is at the end of the target fluctuation). If it is not the end timing of the zone effect (step 57AKS011; No), the specific display process ends.

If it is the end timing of the zone (step 57AKS011; Yes), the control for ending the zone effect is executed (step 57AKS012), and the specific display process is ended. In step 57AKS012, control such as deleting the image corresponding to the zone from the image display device 5 may be executed.

By executing the specific display process as described above by the effect control CPU 120, the effect of the pending change notice and the zone effect as shown in FIG. 11-1 is realized.

(Modification example of feature part 57AK)
The feature portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above-described embodiment are essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. Moreover, you may combine this feature part and other feature part as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, the zone effect is controlled by either the display change high probability zone or the chance zone, but the display change high probability zone may be shifted to the chance zone. For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 (A), when the display change high probability zone is controlled, the display change high probability zone is shown as shown in FIGS. 11-7 (B) and 11-7 (C). The zone display 57AK003 indicating that it is a chance zone may be displayed to indicate that it is a chance zone, and the zone display 57AK005 may be displayed to shift to the chance zone. The timing of transition from the display change high probability zone to the chance zone may be arbitrary, but for example, during the variable display (variable display of the target of the pending change notice) corresponding to the start prize that triggered the transition of the display change high probability zone. , When the display mode of the specific display reaches a predetermined stage or higher (for example, e or higher). By doing so, the display mode of the specific display is easy to change and it is easy to taste the successful experience. Since the display change high probability zone shifts to the chance zone where the jackpot reliability is extremely high, the variation of the production increases and the interest of the game becomes more interesting. improves. In addition, the display change high probability zone may be shifted from the chance zone. Further, the zone may be shifted a plurality of times during one zone production. For example, after shifting to the chance zone, the display mode may shift to the display change high probability zone at the timing when the display mode of the specific display changes, and then shift to the chance zone again.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B)', the zone display 57AK003 indicating that the display change is a high probability zone and the zone display 57AK005 indicating that the display change is a chance zone are both displayed in the two zones. It may be possible to migrate in parallel. By doing so, it is possible to notify that the display mode of the specific display is likely to change and that the jackpot reliability is high, as well as the various effects.

In the above embodiment, the process of changing the display mode of the specific display (the effect mode of the pending change notice) is determined by selecting and determining the display change pattern, but the determination method is arbitrary, for example. The display mode of the specific display at each change timing may be individually determined each time. Further, in the above embodiment, the shift time of the hold display is the change timing, but the change timing is not limited to this, and the change timing of the display mode of the hold display may be any timing during the variable display.

Further, in the above embodiment, when a plurality of specific displays are displayed, it is restricted that when the hold change notice is executed for one specific display, the hold change notice for the other specific display is executed. Not. Therefore, after the display mode of one specific display is changed, the display mode of another specific display (for example, the specific display corresponding to the newly generated start winning prize) may change. On the other hand, in the case of the display change high probability zone, the execution of the pending change notice may be restricted for the specific display corresponding to the newly generated start winning prize. This makes it possible to prevent the specific display and the variable display that should be noted in the display change high probability zone from becoming difficult to understand. In this case, the display mode does not change for the specific display newly displayed in the display change high probability zone after the display change high probability zone ends. On the other hand, the display mode may be further changed for the specific display whose display mode has changed during the display change high probability zone (that is, the specific display that triggered the zone transition). Therefore, it can be said that the specific display whose display mode has changed during the display change high probability zone is more likely to change the display mode than the specific display whose display mode has not changed during the display change high probability zone.

Even after the display change high probability zone (specific effect) is completed, the specific display in which the display mode has changed in the display change high probability zone is different from the specific display in which the display mode has not changed in the display change high probability zone. In addition to the fact that the display mode is likely to change, the specific display whose display mode has changed during the display change high probability zone changes more frequently, and the display mode does not change during the display change high probability zone. The specific display does not change at all, and the specific display whose display mode has changed during the display change high probability zone may change. In addition, the specific display in which the display mode has changed in the display change high probability zone also includes a tendency that the display mode changes more frequently than the specific display in which the display mode does not change in the display change high probability zone.

Display change In the high probability zone, the display mode of a plurality of specific displays may be changed. For example, it may be difficult to tell which is the target by changing the specific display other than the specific display (target specific display) corresponding to the start prize that triggered the transition to the high probability zone of display change to "blue". .. At that time, a hold change notice in which a plurality of specific displays change at the same time, or a change suggestion effect suggesting that a plurality of specific displays change at the same time (for example, an effect is applied to the entire hold display area or an image acts on the effect). May be executed. In this case, a plurality of specific display changes may be successful, or only one may be changed. Further, the pending change notice in which a plurality of specific displays change at the same time may be executed only in the display change high probability zone, or may be executed in a normal state not in another zone or zone production. Good.

In the above embodiment, there is only one type of display change high probability zone, but there may be a plurality of types of display change high probability zones. For example, a weak display change high probability zone in which the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than in the normal state and a strong display change high probability zone in which the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than the weak display change high probability zone are provided. May be. In this case, the display color of the zone display 57AK003 may be changed to indicate which display change high probability zone. For example, the blue zone display 57AK003 may be used in the weak display change high probability zone, and the red zone display 57AK003 may be used in the strong display change high probability zone. Then, the weak display change high probability zone may be shifted to the strong display change high probability zone. When shifting from the weak display change high probability zone to the strong display change high probability zone, the display color of the zone display 57AK003 may be changed. By doing so, it is easy to understand that each is a display change high probability zone, and it is possible to notify that the degree of expectation has changed. Further, as the types of the display change high probability zone, there may be a display change high probability zone in which the probability that the specific display changes is high, and a display change high probability zone in which the number of times the specific display changes is likely to increase.

When a plurality of types of display change high probability zones are provided, it may be possible to shift between each display change high probability zone and the chance zone. For example, the weak display change high probability zone may be shifted to the strong display change high probability zone, and then the chance zone may be shifted. Further, the weak display change high probability zone may be shifted to the chance zone, and then the strong display change high probability zone may be shifted. Further, the zone may be restricted not to shift in a specific route, or an effect of branching the route (an effect indicating which zone to shift to) may be executed.

In the above embodiment, the change suggestion effect is such that the star image 57AK004 acts on the specific display, but the effect mode of the change suggestion effect is not limited to this, and a predetermined image such as a character image is displayed. It may be such that the display mode of the specific display changes depending on the sound, the operation of the lamp, the movable body, or the like. Further, the effect mode (effect device) of the change suggestion effect may be different depending on whether or not the zone is being produced and which zone it is.

In the above embodiment, the zone displays 57AK003 and 57AK005 notify that the zone effect is being executed and which zone is controlled, but the background and sound in the image display device 5 The zone may be notified by the operation of a lamp or a movable body. Further, the background image may be greatly different depending on the zone, the zone type may be displayed in the display area of the specific display (active display area 57AK001, hold display area 57AK002), or the display mode and color of the display area of the specific display may be displayed. May be different depending on the zone.

Further, a sub display device (sub liquid crystal) different from the image display device 5 is provided to display the zone type on the sub liquid crystal, or the sub liquid crystal is movable to notify the zone type according to the operation and position of the sub liquid crystal. You may. Further, the display position, display size, and animation mode (update speed, operation speed, operation direction, etc.) of the specific display may be different depending on the type of zone. The zone notification methods as described above may be any one or may be arbitrarily combined.

A part or all of the configuration of the embodiment and the configuration of the modified example according to the feature portion 57AK may be appropriately combined. Further, the invention relating to the feature portion 57AK and the invention relating to another feature portion may be appropriately combined.

For example, by combining the invention of the feature unit 57AK with the invention of the feature units 53AK and 54AK, the appearance rate and reliability of the pre-reading notice effect (pending change notice, zone effect) of the present application are the same or omitted regardless of the set value. The execution ratio of the pre-reading notice effect may be adjusted according to the set value so as to be within the same range.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 57AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 57AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, hold display, active display) corresponding to variable display.
A change effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, and step 57AKS010) that changes the display mode of the specific display.
It is provided with a specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a zone effect of a display change high probability zone).
When the specific effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not executed.
Even after the specific effect is completed, the specific display whose display mode has changed when the specific effect has been executed is displayed more than the specific display whose display mode has not changed when the specific effect has been executed. The mode is easily changed (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A change suggestion effect (for example, a star shown in FIG. 11-1 (C) or the like) suggesting that the display mode of the specific display changes between when the specific effect is executed and when the specific effect is not executed. The execution rate of the image 57AK004 acting on the specific display) may be different (for example, the change suggestion effect may be executed only in the display change high probability zone).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
The specific display in which the display mode is changed to the predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed is more likely to change in the display mode than the specific display in which the display mode is changed to the predetermined mode when the specific effect is not executed. For example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above
A special effect executing means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS011) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a zone effect of a chance zone) different from the specific effect is provided.
The display mode of the specific display may be changed more easily when the specific effect is executed than when the special effect is executed.
With such a configuration, the production becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above
A special effect executing means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS011) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a zone effect of a chance zone) different from the specific effect is provided.
When the special effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher than when the specific effect is executed.
It may be possible to shift from the specific effect to the special effect (see, for example, FIG. 11-7).
With such a configuration, the production becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

1 Pachinko game machine 120 CPU for production control
30 Ball striking operation handle 31A Stick controller 31B Push button Z1 Controller image Z17 Handle image Z3 Push button image ZA1-5 Parts image ZB1-4 Parts image ZC1-5 Parts image

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A detection means that can detect the movement of the player,
A promotion effect executing means capable of executing a promotion effect for prompting the player to perform an action that can be detected by the detection means, and a promotion effect executing means.
A step effect executing means capable of executing a step effect in which the display mode of the special effect image changes stepwise before the promotion effect is executed is provided.
The stage effect executing means can display an effect image related to the effect image used for the promotion effect as the special effect image.
The promotion effect execution means
The promotion effect can be executed in a plurality of types of modes including the first aspect and the second aspect in which the rate of becoming the advantageous state is higher than that in the case where the promotion effect of the first aspect is executed. Yes,
When the display mode of the special effect image changes to the special display mode in the stage effect, the promotion effect can be executed in the second aspect.
further,
A change effect execution means that changes the display mode of a specific display,
Equipped with a specific effect execution means that can execute a specific effect,
When the specific effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not executed.
Even after the specific effect is completed, the specific display whose display mode has changed when the specific effect has been executed is displayed more than the specific display whose display mode has not changed when the specific effect has been executed. A game machine characterized in that its mode is easily changed.

Images